Jaguar Jjm 18 02 30 701 Users Manual

JJM 18 02 30 701 to the manual 252a2b91-d9a8-4275-9653-62b558204f78

2015-02-09

: Jaguar Jaguar-Jjm-18-02-30-701-Users-Manual-566666 jaguar-jjm-18-02-30-701-users-manual-566666 jaguar pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 260 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

OWNER’S HANDBOOK

Publication Part No. JJM 18 02 30 701

This handbook forms part of the Owner literature supplied with your vehicle. Right-hand

drive and left-hand drive situations are shown in the graphics and where information is

specific to a particular country, it is indicated as such.

The Quick Start section is designed to rapidly familiarise the driver with the initial set up

and also explain some of the unique features. Please take the time to study the operating

instructions with your vehicle as soon as you can.

Important

The information contained in this handbook covers all vehicle derivatives and optional

equipment . Some of the options will not be fitted to your vehicle unless they formed part

of the original vehicle specification. Therefore, some parts of this handbook may not

apply to your vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles, it may include descriptions of

options before they become generally available.

The information contained in this publication was correct when it went to print. Vehicle

design changes may have been made after this handbook was printed. When this occurs

a handbook supplement is added to the literature pack. Subsequent updates can be

viewed on the Jaguar internet site at http://www.ownerinfo.jaguar.com.

In the interest of development, the right is reserved to change specifications, design or

equipment at any time without notice and without incurring any obligations. This

publication, or part thereof, may not be produced nor translated without our approval.

Errors and omissions excepted.

©Jaguar Cars Limited 2006.

Published by Jaguar Cars Limited Technical Communications.

Handbook Contents

Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Filling Station Information . . . . . . . . . . 27

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . 33

Keys and Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . 34

Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Engine Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Fuel and Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Driving Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Wipers and Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Windows and Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Occupant Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Child Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Facia and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Convenience Features . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Convertible Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Load Carrying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Stability Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . . 172

Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) . . . . . 180

Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Emergency Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Status After a Collision . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Vehicle Recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Vehicle Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Wheels and Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . 282

Type Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

A comprehensive index is located at the

back of this handbook.

Quick Start

KEYLESS ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

REMOTE HANDSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

CENTRAL LOCKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . 8

ENGINE START/STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

SEAT ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

STEERING COLUMN - LOCK AND

ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

INTERIOR MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

WINDOWS/DOOR MIRRORS . . . . . . . 11

SEAT POSITION MEMORY . . . . . . . . 11

SEAT BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

CENTRE CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . 13

CLIMATE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

FACIA AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . 15

EXTERIOR LAMPS/TRIP COMPUTER 17

WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . . . . . 17

WARNING INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . 17

PARKBRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

PARKING ASSIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

CRUISE (SPEED) CONTROL . . . . . . . 21

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) 21

TOUCH-SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

SOUND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

RADIO OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

CD OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

NAVIGATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

TELEPHONE -

BLUETOOTH SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Filling Station Information

FUEL TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

HOOD RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

UNDERHOOD TOP-UP . . . . . . . . . . . 28

ULTRA HIGH PERFORMANCE

TYRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

TIRE PRESSURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Quick Start

KEYLESS ENTRY

Entering the vehicle

The keyless entry system allows access

to the vehicle without the need for

pressing the unlock button on the remote

handset.

When a door handle, or the luggage

compartment release button are

operated, the vehicle will search for a

recognised remote handset signal before

unlocking. The handset must be within

one metre of the entry point.

The buttons on the remote handset can

be used to lock/unlock the vehicle when

approaching or leaving the vehicle.

Leaving the vehicle

The vehicle will not automatically lock, or

arm the alarm. To leave the vehicle in a

secure condition either:

•press the button on the door handle

once (arrowed in the illustration)

•or press the lock button on the remote

handset.

REMOTE HANDSET

•Press once to lock the vehicle and

arm the alarm.

•Press twice within three seconds to

double lock the vehicle.

•Press once to disarm the alarm,

unlock the driver’s door, and unlock

the luggage compartment.

•Press again to unlock the passenger

door.

•Press once to switch the headlamps

on for 25 seconds. Press again to

switch off.

•Press to deactivate the alarm, and

unlock the luggage compartment.

JAG0424G

JAG0423G

Quick Start

•Press three times in three seconds, or

press and hold for longer than three

seconds to activate/cancel the panic

alarm.

Unlocking mode alternatives

Single stage unlocking will unlock the

vehicle with a single press. Two stage

unlocking will unlock the driver’s door

with a single press, and all other doors

with a second press.

To change between modes, press and

hold the unlock button for four seconds.

The direction indicators will flash twice to

confirm the change.

CENTRAL LOCKING

Interior door locks

Press either of the interior door release

levers to lock both doors and the luggage

compartment.

Pull the release lever to unlock the door.

Drive away door locking

This feature can be enabled or disabled

via the Vehicle - Security settings on the

touch-screen.

If enabled, the luggage compartment and

doors will automatically lock when the

vehicle’s forward speed exceeds 7 km/h

(5 mph).

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT

Caution: If the luggage compartment is

opened when the driver and passenger

doors are locked, ensure that the

Jaguar Smart Key remains outside the

vehicle when it is closed again. If the

Jaguar Smart key is inadvertently left

inside the vehicle (luggage

compartment) an audible alarm will

sound and the luggage compartment

lid will initially re-open. If the lid is

subsequently closed without removing

the Jaguar Smart Key from the luggage

compartment, you will be locked out.

You should contact your Jaguar

Dealer.

The luggage compartment is electrically

locked in conjunction with the driver’s

door.

To open the luggage compartment with

the vehicle locked:

•press the luggage compartment

button on the remote handset.

To open the luggage compartment with

the vehicle unlocked:

•press the button on the facia.

Or:

•press the release button on the

luggage compartment lid.

JAG0425G

Quick Start

Emergency key blade access

In the event of a discharged vehicle

battery, or other problem opening the

luggage compartment, it can be opened

by using the key blade in the luggage

compartment lock.

Care points

•The registration plate has to be

removed to access the luggage

compartment lock.

•The vehicle’s alarm will sound if the

luggage compartment is unlocked

with the key blade, whilst the vehicle

is locked.

ENGINE START/STOP

The engine START/STOP button is only

operational when a recognised remote

handset is detected within the vehicle.

•A single press of the engine start/stop

button will switch on the ignition

system.

•Another press of the switch will switch

off the ignition system.

•With the gear selector in P (Park) and

the brake pedal depressed, press the

engine START/STOP button to start

the engine.

•Press the button to stop the engine

and switch off the ignition.

JAG0426G

JAG0427G

JAG0428G

Quick Start

SEAT ADJUSTMENT

1. Cushion extension switch.

2. Lower backrest and lumbar support

switch.

3. Recline adjustment switch.

4. Side bolster adjustment switch.

Rotate to adjust the side bolster

cushions.

5. Fore/aft, cushion height, and front tilt

control switch.

Note: Seat heating adjustment is via the

main touch-screen, see page 61.

STEERING COLUMN - LOCK

AND ADJUSTMENT

Steering column lock

The steering column has an electronic

lock that is automatically disengaged

whenever a recognised remote handset is

inside the vehicle.

Vehicle recovery

Caution: If the vehicle requires

recovery assistance, the remote

handset must remain in the vehicle to

prevent the steering column lock

engaging.

Steering column adjustment

Turn the control on the left-hand side of

the steering column to COLUMN and

move to adjust the height and reach.

Automatic steering column movement

If the control is set to AUTO, the position

of the steering column will automatically

adjust to provide greater clearance for

exit and entry when the driver’s door is

opened for exiting the vehicle.

The steering column will return to the

driving position when the driver’s door is

closed and the engine start button is

pressed.

Note: To prevent automatic movement of

the steering column, turn the control to

the COLUMN position.

INTERIOR MIRROR

With the ignition on, the rear view mirror

will automatically darken in proportion to

the amount of glare detected from a

following vehicle’s headlamps. This

feature is automatically switched off when

reverse gear is selected.

JAG0429 L

JAG0430G

Quick Start

WINDOWS/DOOR MIRRORS

Front windows

The windows are fitted with a facility that

allows them to be fully opened or closed

with a single operation of the switch.

•To open the window, press the

respective switch. Press the switch

again to stop the window from fully

opening.

•To close the window, pull the switch

up. Pull the switch again to prevent to

window from closing fully.

Door mirror adjustment

Press the L (left) or R (right) button to

select the required mirror for adjustment.

Use the four-way switch 1 to adjust the

position of the selected mirror.

Mirror dip when reversing

The passenger door mirror can be

programmed to dip automatically when R

(reverse) is selected. This will provide a

better view along the side of the vehicle to

aid parking. The dip position of the mirror

can be adjusted via the four-way switch.

This feature can be enabled/disabled via

the Vehicle - Parking settings on the

Touch-screen.

SEAT POSITION MEMORY

Driver’s seat

Once you have adjusted the driver’s seat,

steering column, and exterior mirrors, the

vehicle can memorise these settings for

future use.

1. Push the memory button M, the red

LED will illuminate for five seconds.

2. Whilst the LED is illuminated, press

button 1, 2, or 3, to memorise the

current settings.

The LED will extinguish, and a chime will

sound to confirm that the settings have

been memorised. If the ignition is on, the

message centre will display a

confirmation message.

Passenger seat

The procedure to memorise a passenger

seat position is the same as that for the

driver’s seat with two exceptions. There

will be no chime or message to confirm

the settings.

JAG0431 L

JAG0432L

Quick Start

Recalling a seat position

To recall a memorised seat position,

simply press and hold button 1, 2, or 3.

The button should be held until the seat

has stopped moving.

Note: A seat position will only be

memorised during the five second period

whilst the LED is illuminated.

Any existing settings will be over-written

when programming a memory position.

SEAT BELTS

!WARNING:

The use of front and rear seat belts is

mandatory in most countries.

Using seat belts saves lives.

A warning indicator on the instrument

panel will illuminate to warn you that the

driver’s and/or front passenger’s seat belt

is unbuckled. This may also be

accompanied by a warning chime.

CENTRE CONSOLE

Operate the release button, and slide the

armrest rearwards to access the cup

holders.

To open the cubby box, operate the

release button, and lift the armrest. The

armrest will slide back under it’s own

weight to provide better access to the

cubby box.

The cubby box has space to store six

standard CD cases.

JAG0433L

JAG0434L

Quick Start

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

Caution: Do not open or close the

convertible top whilst the vehicle is in

motion. Doing so may damage the

convertible top and/or it’s operating

mechanism.

Do not press the engine stop/start

button whilst the convertible top is

opening or closing. Doing so will cause

the system to loose it’s position

memory.

Convertible top

When operating the convertible top, the

switch must be pressed, and held, until

the second chime is heard. The second

chime confirms that the convertible top

has reached the end of it’s operation.

•To open press and hold the rear of

switch 1. The windows will fully open.

•To close press and hold the front of

switch 1.

Rear windows

The rear windows can be operated when

the convertible top is closed.

•To open press and release the rear of

switch 1. The windows will open fully.

•To close press and hold the front of

switch 1. Release the switch to stop

raising the windows.

Garage door opener

For information on the Garage door

opener buttons 2, see page 143.

CLIMATE CONTROL

The following are the primary functions of

the climate control system. The climate

control system can also be operated via

the touch-screen, which gives access to

other features, such as heated

seats/steering wheel.

Auto (automatic) mode

Press AUTO to turn on and select

automatic operation of the climate control

system. The system will automatically

adjust the heat output, blower speed, air

intake, and airflow distribution, to

maintain the selected temperature, and

reduce misting without the need for

constant manual adjustments.

The front and rear screen heating, and

timed air recirculation, may be selected in

AUTO mode. Selecting any other

function will cancel AUTO operation.

Air conditioning

Air conditioning is an integral part of the

climate control system. The air provided

is cooled and dehumidified, which helps

to prevent misting of the windows.

Air conditioning is automatically switched

on and controlled, whenever the system is

operating in AUTO or DEF modes.

JAG0562N

JAG0505N

Quick Start

External water deposits

The air conditioning system removes

moisture from the air and deposits excess

water beneath the vehicle. Puddles may

form, but this is normal, and no cause for

concern.

Recommended mode

Select AUTO as the normal operating

mode. This will help prevent window

misting and odours from the climate

control system.

Air recirculation

Press the recirculation button to select. A

symbol will appear on the Touch-screen

and an LED in the button will illuminate.

To de-select air recirculation, press the

recirculation button again, or press the

AUTO button.

Blower speed

Set the blower speed as required by

adjusting the rotary control knob. Any

adjustment of the knob will cancel AUTO

mode.

Temperature selection

Press the red buttons to increase the

temperature, and the blue buttons to

decrease the temperature.

The passenger and driver temperatures

will automatically synchronise if HI or LO

is selected via the driver’s side control.

Windshield defrost/demist

Press the DEF button to remove frost or

heavy misting from the windshield. To

de-select defrost mode, press the DEF or

AUTO buttons.

Heated screen and door mirrors

The rear screen heater can be switched

on and off in any mode, even when the

climate control system is off. It will only

operate when the engine is running.

The door mirror heaters are controlled by

the rear screen heater button.

System off

Select the ON/OFF button located under

the Climate tab on the touch-screen.

Climate

Quick Start

FACIA AND CONTROLS

Auto

Inst Fuel

l/100km

JAG0511N

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1720

Quick Start

1. Steering wheel audio switches (64).

2. External light switches (71).

3. Jaguar sequential gear change down

paddle (159).

4. Speedometer (111).

5. Driver’s horn and air bag (63).

6. Message centre (118).

7. Tachometer (111).

8. Jaguar sequential gear change up

paddle (159).

9. Wiper and washer switch (65).

10. Cruise control or adaptive cruise

control switches (169).

11. Audio panel (184).

12. Hazard warning switch (76).

13. Touch-screen display (121).

14. Climate control panel (134).

15. Glove box compartment release

button (142).

16. Gear selector (157).

17. Automatic speed limiter switch (180).

18. Parkbrake switch (164).

19. Dynamic stability control mode switch

(166).

20. Engine Start and Stop switch (50).

21. Ashtray and cigar lighter (140).

22. Steering column adjustment switch

(62).

23. Front fog lamp switch (75).

24. Dimmer switch (140).

25. Rear fog lamp switch (75).

26. Luggage compartment release switch

(43).

27. Forward alert switch (177).

28. Fuel filler flap release switch (52).

29. Hood release lever (234).

Page numbers (shown in brackets) refer

to pages in this handbook that have

further relevant information.

Quick Start

EXTERIOR LAMPS/TRIP

COMPUTER

Move the stalk up or down to activate the

direction indicators.

Press the button on the end of the stalk to

cycle through the trip computer displays.

Rotate the collar on the stalk to select:

•sidelamps

•headlamps

•autolamps

•headlamp exit delay.

In AUTO mode, a sensor monitors the

exterior light levels. The sensor will

automatically switch the sidelamps and

dipped headlamps on and off.

WIPERS AND WASHERS

A. Intermittent wipe.

B. Slow speed operation.

C. High speed operation.

Press the button on the end of the stalk

for wash/wipe. Rotate the collar to adjust

the time delay for intermittent wipe, or to

select AUTO for automatic operation of

the wipers.

Enabling automatic operation

The wiper stalk must be in position A and

AUTO selected on the collar to enable

automatic operation of the wipers.

WARNING INDICATORS

Sidelamps on. (Green).

Headlamp main beam on. (Blue).

Front fog lamps on. (Green).

JAG0438G

JAG0439G

Quick Start

Rear fog lamp on. (Amber).

Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) active.

(Green).

Direction indicator. (Green).

Seat belt reminder. (Red).

Forward alert active. (Amber).

Parkbrake on/Low brake fluid (Red)

(USA only)

Anti-Lock braking system fault (Amber)

(USA only)

Parkbrake on/Low brake fluid (Red)

(Canada and Mexico only).

Anti-Lock braking system fault (Amber)

(Canada and Mexico only).

Engine malfunction. (Amber).

Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) off

(normally aspirated engines only).

TracDSC ON.

DSC system fault (Amber).

Adaptive Cruise Control active. (Amber).

Air bag system fault. (Amber).

Adaptive front lighting system fault.

(Amber).

Low tire pressure warning. (Yellow).

Quick Start

Automatic exterior lamps

If AUTO (autolamps) has been selected,

and the windshield wipers are operated

continuously for more than twenty

seconds, then the exterior lamps will be

switched on automatically.

PARKBRAKE

•Parkbrake will automatically release

when the gear selector is moved from

P (Park) with the footbrake applied.

•Parkbrake can be manually released

when the engine is running and the

footbrake is applied. Press the

parkbrake switch down to release,

and pull it up to apply.

•If manually applied whilst in D or R,

the Parkbrake will automatically

release when the accelerator is

applied.

TRANSMISSION

Gearshift interlock

The ignition must be on, and the

footbrake applied, before the gear

selector can be moved from P (Park) to R

(Reverse). The selector can be moved into

P with the ignition off.

Sports mode

When the gear selector is moved from D

(Drive) to S (Sport) automatic changing of

the gears is maintained. However, the

gear shift points are modified to make full

use of the engine’s power.

Note: With the selector lever in S, and DS

displayed in the message centre, the

transmission will enter 6th gear less often

at higher cruising speeds.

Fuel consumption will be adversely

affected.

Manual operation

Manual changing of the gears via the

steering wheel paddles is possible when

the gear selector is in either D (Drive) or S

(Sport).

JAG0440L

JAG0441G

Quick Start

Operation of the paddles whilst in D will

temporarily select manual gear selection

mode. This will be automatically

cancelled after a short period of driving at

a steady speed, or can be cancelled by

holding the (+) paddle for approximately

one second.

Operation of the paddles in S will

permanently select manual gear

selection. Once selected, it will only be

cancelled if the gear selector is moved

into D.

•To shift down, briefly pull the

(-) paddle.

•To shift up, briefly pull the (+) paddle.

PARKING ASSIST

When R (Reverse) is selected, the

Touch-screen displays a representation

of the vehicle, and indicates any

obstruction which is detected to the front

or rear of the vehicle.

If an obstruction is detected, a coloured

bar will be displayed showing it’s

approximate distance from the vehicle.

This will be accompanied by an audible

alert that increases frequency as the

object is approached.

The volume of the alert can be changed

via the Vehicle - Parking settings on the

Touch-screen.

Parking assist is automatically cancelled

when D (Drive) is selected, and the vehicle

speed exceeds 15 km/h (9 mph).

Parking assist care points

Sensors may activate when water, snow,

or ice, are detected on the surface of the

sensors. This is normal for such sensors,

and regular cleaning will maintain

performance.

JAG0442G

Home

Audio

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

Valet

12 : 26 pm

Parking Aid Alert

JAG0265NAS

Quick Start

Parking assist may sound if it detects a

frequency range close to that of the

sensors (e.g. motorcycles, or air brakes).

CRUISE (SPEED) CONTROL

Speed control is the standard cruise

control system which enables the vehicle

to maintain a set road speed until either

cruise control is cancelled, or the brake

pedal is applied.

The system is controlled via switches on

the steering wheel:

1. (+) or (-) to set the road speed to be

maintained, or increase/decrease the

speed in 2 km/h (1 mph) steps when

cruise control is operating.

2. CANCEL - cancels cruise control, but

retains the set speed in the memory.

3. RESUME - to resume a set speed

retained in the memory.

Note: Cruise control will automatically

disengage when the brake pedal is

applied, or when the vehicle speed falls

below 30 km/h (18 mph).

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL

(ACC)

!WARNING:

Adaptive cruise control is not a

collision avoidance system

Adaptive cruise control is designed to aid

the driver maintain a gap to the vehicle

ahead, or to maintain a SET road speed if

there is no slower vehicle ahead.

The system is controlled via switches on

the steering wheel:

1. (+) or (-)to set the road speed to be

maintained, or increase/decrease the

speed in 2 km/h (1 mph) steps when

cruise control is operating.

2. GAP - increase/decrease the time gap

to the vehicle ahead.

3. CANCEL - cancels cruise control, but

retains the set speed in the memory.

4. RESUME - to resume a set speed

retained in the memory.

The gap to the vehicle ahead can be

changed to one of four pre-defined

intervals. The current setting will be

displayed in the message centre.

JAG0035G

JAG0274G

Quick Start

If a slower vehicle is

encountered or enters the

same lane as you, the road

speed will be adjusted to maintain the

currently selected time gap. The warning

light will illuminate to indicate that the

vehicle is in follow mode.

Note: The system will not detect:

•

Stationary, or slow moving vehicles

below 10 km/h (6 mph).

•

Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.

•

Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.

TOUCH-SCREEN

The Touch-screen allows control of the

audio, climate, phone, and navigation

systems. The screen only requires a light

touch to operate functions. Excessive

pressure on the screen can result in

damage to the screen.

1. Touch-screen. When initially

activated, the Touch-screen will

display the Home screen.

2. Touch-screen On/Off. Press to turn

the screen on.

Press to put the Touch-screen into

screen saver mode, press again to

turn off the screen.

3. Home screen button. Press at any

time to return to the Home screen.

Most screens feature a return icon

in the bottom right-hand corner.

Touch this icon to return to the

previous screen.

SOUND SETTINGS

General operation

Press the control knob to switch on/off,

and rotate to adjust volume.

Press the SOURCE button repeatedly to

scroll through FM1, FM2, AM, and CD

options.

Steering wheel controls

1. Rotate up or down to increase or

decrease volume.

Home

Audio

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

71 70

F F

.5 .0

Valet

Radio

90.7 FM1

KALX

12 : 26 pm

JAG0444NAS

JAG0445G

JAG0034G

1 2

4 3

Quick Start

2. Rotate up or down to scroll through

preset radio stations or CD tracks.

Holding the wheel in the up or down

position for two seconds will seek

forward or backwards to the next

available signal.

3. Press repeatedly to scroll through

FM1, FM2, AM, and CD options.

4. Press to mute the audio unit. This

button is also used in phone mode.

RADIO OPERATION

Caution: Ensure that the audio system

is turned OFF so that the aerial is

retracted before using an automatic

car wash. Allow time for the aerial to

retract.

From the Audio control screen, touch the

AM/FM tab to select radio. Subsequent

touches of this icon will scroll through the

available wavebands.

Storing stations

Touch Autostore to automatically store

the nine strongest signals.

To manually store a station, search for the

station using the seek icons 1. Once the

station has been found, touch and hold

one of the station icons 2 to store the

station. An alert tone sounds to indicate

that the station has been stored.

The audio system has additional features

which include: FM text, Traffic

Announcements (TA), Programme Type

(PTY), Regionalisation (REG), and

Extended Other Networks (EON).

CD OPERATION

From the Audio control screen, touch the

CD icon to access the CD player control

screen. The CD player has an integral

6-disc multi changer. The example

illustrated shows the multi changer

loaded with four CD’s, with one disc

playing.

Loading CDs

Insert a CD into the slot label side up, a

CD loading message is displayed. Press

and hold the LOAD button, and follow the

on-screen instructions. Continue to load

CDs until the player is full, or you have

inserted the desired number.

To eject the selected CD, press the eject

button. Press and hold to eject each CD in

turn.

Autostore

Settings

Audio

JAG0446NAS

12 : 26 pm

PTY 3CH

AM 770 WABC

WABC WFAN

WXRP WNYC WPLJ

WQXR WHTZ WHUD

WCBS

Tr 15 03:25

DPLII

Folders

Settings

Audio

1234 56

Mix Repeat

JAG0447NAS

12 : 26 pm

256

Quick Start

Playing a CD

1. To play a CD touch the icon for the

required CD number.

To pause play press the pause icon, a

further press will continue playback.

Touch and release the skip forward

icon to advance to the beginning of

the next track. Touch and hold to

advance through the current track,

and subsequent tracks, until the icon

is released.

Touch and release the skip back icon

to return to the previous track. Touch

and hold to move back through the

current track, and subsequent tracks,

until the icon is released.

5. Touch and release Mix to randomly

play tracks from the selected CD.

Touch and hold for two seconds to

play tracks randomly from all loaded

CDs.

6. Touch and release Repeat to play the

selected track again. Touch and hold

for two seconds to play the entire disc

again.

NAVIGATION

The Navigation system features include:

Compass, Points of Interest, Memory

Points, Split screen, Previous destination,

and Route preferences. For details of

these features refer to the Navigation

Handbook.

Setting a destination

To set a destination and start using the

system:

1. Select Navigation from the home

screen, and when prompted touch

Agree to access the initial map

screen.

2. Touch Menu to access the navigation

menu, then touch Destination Entry.

If the map is displayed, select Menu

to access the Destination Entry.

3. Touch Address or Postcode.

JAG0453NAS

OXFORD

M 4 0

12 : 26 pm

Stored

Destination

Auto Voice

Entry

Guidance Off

Locations

Navigation

Setup

Route

Options

JAG0454NAS

Delete

,()OK

QWER T YU I O P

AS DF GHJ KL

ZXCV BNM

12 : 26 pm

23456 7 89 0

Input Zip code

Zip code

Quick Start

4. Enter the Town, Address, and

House Number, using the on-screen

keypad. Select the Display Map

button and then select Destination.

For post code entry, enter the post

code.

Select OK to enter.

5. Select Destination to confirm.

6. Once calculated, the screen displays

Route 1. To view and select

alternative routes, touch the 3 Route

icon.

7. Touch Start to commence navigation.

Drive away following the voice

guidance.

Touch the audible repeat icon to hear the

last voice instruction again. To mute voice

guidance, go to the navigation Menu

screen or, if the map is displayed, select

Menu. Then select Auto Voice Guidance

Off or On by touching the blue bar.

Upon arrival at your destination an audio

announcement, and on-screen message

will confirm your arrival.

Cancelling guidance

To cancel guidance go to Menu, Route

Options, Cancel Guidance.

TELEPHONE - BLUETOOTH

SYSTEM

cell phones with Bluetooth capability can

communicate with the vehicle’s inbuilt

telephone system.

The following procedure demonstrates

how to connect the most popular brands

of cell phone.

Paring And Docking A Handset

1. Enable the cell phone’s Bluetooth

function. Refer to the handset

manufacturer’s instructions for

guidance.

2. Select Phone from the Home screen.

3. If no phones have been Paired, No

phone found will be displayed. Touch

Yes to confirm a new phone search.

The system will then search for

Bluetooth enabled handsets in the

vicinity.

WASHINGTON

DELAWARE

PHILADELPHIA

110 mi

N Beechwood Street

NQuick

JAG0455NAS

12 : 26 pm

Phone

12 : 26 pm

Vertu Ascent

Nokia 623

Pair & dock

Delete

Not

Paired

Phone

Cancel

To pair & dock phone

Enter (5616) on handset

JAG0451NAS

Quick Start

4. Once the system has recognised the

handset, the name of the phone will

appear on the phone list. Touch the

Pair & Dock icon.

5. The screen will display a random

four-digit code. Enter the code to the

handset and follow any instructions

displayed on the handset.

When the handset has been successfully

docked to the system, the Digit Dial

screen is displayed.

Downloading phonebook entries

1. Select Phone from the Home screen.

2. Touch Settings, then select Phone

Options.

3. Select Phonebook from the Menu.

4. Ensure that Auto Download is on. All

the numbers in your cell phone will be

transferred to the vehicle’s system the

next time that the phone is connected

to the system.

Making a call

1. With a paired and docked handset,

select Phone from the Home screen.

2. From the Digit Dial screen, enter the

number using the on-screen keypad.

Touch the phone icon on the screen,

or the call button on the steering

wheel control.

The call duration will appear on the

Touch-screen.

Receiving A Call

To answer or end a call touch Accept on

the screen, or press the call button on the

steering wheel control.

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

Phone

Options

12 : 26 pm

01926648100

JAG0452NAS

JAG0450G

Filling Station Information

Filling Sta tion Inform ation

FUEL TYPE

Unleaded 91 Octane

Caution: This vehicle is not suitable for

use with fuels containing more than 10

per cent ethanol. Do not use E85 fuels

(85 per cent ethanol content).

Equipment necessary for the use of

fuels containing more than 10 per cent

ethanol is not fitted to this vehicle. If

E85 fuels are used, serious engine and

fuel system damage will occur.

Fuel filling

Press the fuel filler flap release, located on

the driver’s knee bolster switchpack

below the facia, see ‘FUEL FILLER FLAP’,

page 52.

The filler flap is located on the right-hand

side of the vehicle.

When refuelling, ensure that the fuel

nozzle rests on the bottom of the filler

neck.

Refit the fuel filler cap by twisting the filler

cap clockwise until it clicks. Close the

flap, which automatically locks shut.

Incorrect replacement of the fuel filler cap

may result in check engine warning

indicator (malfunction warning indicator,

MIL) illuminating.

JAG0051L

AVE FUEL

MPG

JAG0054NAS

Filling Station Information

HOOD RELEASE

Pull the release lever located below the

facia on the left-hand side of the vehicle,

see 234.

UNDERHOOD TOP-UP

Recommended engine oil.

Castrol 5W-30 to Jaguar specification

WSS M2C913 - A or B, see page 237.

Windshield and headlamp washer

reservoir.

See page 239.

Coolant system

50% water 50% antifreeze, see page 238.

TIRE PRESSURES

Tire pressure label USA only

The recommended tire pressures for all

normal operating conditions, are shown

on a label fixed to the pillar behind the

driver’s door.

Canada and Mexico only: The

recommended tire pressures for all

normal operating conditions, are shown

on a label fixed to the end of the driver’s

door.

For your convenience you may wish to

record the tire pressures in the boxes

provided below. If you are unsure of the

correct pressures, please contact your

Jaguar Dealer.

JAG0056G

JAG0059N

JAG0057G

Filling Station Information

!WARNING:

When using tires other than those

recommended by Jaguar, do not

exceed the speed capacity

recommended by the manufacturer.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS), see page 267, monitors the

pressures of the tires, providing a warning

of low tire pressure.

If a warning appears one, or more, of your

tires are significantly under-inflated. You

should stop and check your tire pressures

as soon as possible. They should be

inflated to the recommended pressure. If

warnings appear repeatedly, the cause

must be investigated and rectified.

Check pressures when the tires are cold.

Deflating a warm tire to the recommended

cold inflation pressure, will result in

dangerous under-inflation.

ULTRA HIGH PERFORMANCE

TIRES

Caution: Ultra high performance tires.

This vehicle is equipped with an Ultra

High Performance (UHP) tire and wheel

combination designed to give

maximum dry road performance with

consideration for aquaplaning

resistance. UHP tires have

performance enhancing soft rubber

tread compound. If driven aggressively

they may suffer rapid tread wear and a

shorter life than can be expected from

other tire types. This wheel and tire

combination is more susceptible to

damage from road hazards.

Do not use this combination for driving

on snow or ice. High perfromance tires

must be replaced with winter tires

when weather conditions dictate.

Tires with an all season icon and or

M+S marking have a level of winter

performance and need not be

replaced.

FRONT

Normal Driving

Laden/High Speed

REAR

Normal Driving

Laden/High Speed

Spare Wheel

AVE FUEL

MPG

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE

JAG0060NAS

Introduction

Chapter 1

HEALTH AND SAFETY

!WARNING:

California Proposition 65:

Engine exhaust, some of its

constituents and certain vehicle

components, contain or emit

chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth

defects or other reproductive harm.

In addition, certain fluids contained in

vehicles and certain products of

component wear contain or emit

chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth

defects or other reproductive harm.

SYMBOLS GLOSSARY

Warnings, cautions and notes

Take particular note of WARNINGS,

Cautions and Notes given throughout this

handbook.

!WARNING:

Warnings are displayed in this

handbook to help avoid the risk of

personal injury.

Caution: Cautions are displayed in this

handbook to reduce the possibility of

damage to the vehicle.

Note: Notes are used to help avoid

difficulties in the operation of the vehicle.

Warning symbols on the vehicle

Caution: Do not remove any warning

labels from the vehicle.

These symbols advise you to read the

handbook before touching this part of the

vehicle or attempting adjustments of any

kind.

JAG0063G

Introduction

Label locations

Shown below are the main locations that

contain vehicle warning and information

labels:

1. Vehicle certification.

Air bag.

Child restraint.

Tire placard.

2. Air conditioning.

Emissions.

3. Under hood warnings.

4. Coolant warnings.

5. Fuel warnings.

6. Battery.

PARTS AND ACCESSORIES

!WARNING:

Do not fit unapproved accessories or

conversions, as they could affect the

safety of the vehicle.

Jaguar Cars Limited will not accept any

liability for death, personal injury or

damage to property which may occur

as a direct result of fitment of

non-approved conversions to Jaguar

vehicles.

Jaguar Cars Limited strongly advise

against making any modifications to

the suspension or steering systems.

This could seriously affect the handling

and stability of the vehicle leading to

loss of control or roll-over.

The use of non-genuine parts and

accessories may invalidate the vehicle

warranty.

Genuine Jaguar parts and accessories

Your Jaguar Dealer can supply you with

genuine replacement parts and

accessories which are fully approved to

Jaguar’s original equipment specification.

Electrical accessories

!WARNING:

Alterations to the electrical system,

including the fitting of accessories not

designed for this Jaguar, will cause

damage to the electrical systems. This

could result in a malfunction or fire. All

accessory work should be entrusted to

a Jaguar Dealer.

JAG0560G

Introduction

Ground points

Caution: Under no circumstances must

holes be drilled in the bodywork to

accept ground terminals.

If an accessory needs to be connected to

a ground point, it is advisable to consult a

Jaguar Dealer.

DATA RECORDING

Service data recording

Service data recorders in your vehicle are

capable of collecting and storing

diagnostic information about your vehicle.

This potentially includes information

about the performance or status of

various systems and modules in the

vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering

or brake systems.

In order to properly diagnose and service

your vehicle, Jaguar Cars Limited and

service and repair facilities may access

vehicle diagnostic information through a

direct connection to your vehicle when

diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.

Event data recording

Other modules in your vehicle - event data

recorders - are capable of collecting and

storing data during a crash or near crash

event. The recorded information may

assist in the investigation of such an

event. The modules may record

information about both the vehicle and

the occupants, potentially including

information such as:

•How various systems in your vehicle

were operating.

•Whether or not the driver and

passenger seat belts were buckled.

•How far, if at all, the driver was

depressing the accelerator and/or the

brake pedal.

•How fast the vehicle was travelling.

•Where the driver was positioning the

steering wheel.

To access this information special

equipment must be directly connected to

the recording modules. Jaguar Cars

Limited do not access event data

recorder information without obtaining

consent, unless pursuant to court order or

where required by law enforcement, other

government authorities or third parties

acting with lawful authority.

Other parties may seek to access the

information independently of Jaguar Cars

Limited.

Reporting Safety Defects

Vehicle defects (U.S. Only)

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or could

cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National Highway

Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in

addition to notifying Jaguar Cars.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints,

it may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become

involved in individual problems between

you, your Dealer, or Jaguar Cars.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free

at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY:

1-800-424-9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator,

NHTSA,

400 Seventh Street SW.,

Washington, DC. 20590.

To contact Jaguar Cars, call 1–800 4

Jaguar.

You can also obtain other information

about motor safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

Vehicle defects (Canada only)

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or could

cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform Transport Canada in

addition to notifying Jaguar Cars.

To contact Transport Canada, call their

toll-free number 1-800-333-0510.

Keys and Remote Controls

Keys and Remote Con trols

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

The security system and entry to the

vehicle are controlled by the Jaguar

Smart Key. Both doors and the luggage

compartment can be locked and

unlocked using the remote control

buttons.

Keyless Entry is an enhancement of the

Jaguar Smart Key. It allows entry to the

vehicle without any button pressing.

Full security integrity of the vehicle is still

maintained, see Keyless Entry page 41.

The remote control also allows the vehicle

to be started without the use of an ignition

key - Keyless Starting, see page 50.

Two handsets, comprising of a

transmitter body with a detachable metal

emergency key blade are supplied.

Separate emergency key blades are

available from Jaguar Dealers.

Caution:

•Remove all remote controls from

the vehicle when it is left

unattended. This will ensure the

vehicle is left in a secure condition.

•If a remote control is lost, a

replacement can be obtained and

programmed to the vehicle by a

Jaguar Dealer. Notify a Jaguar

Dealer as soon as a remote control

is lost or stolen and have the

remaining remote control(s)

reprogrammed.

The emergency key blade number is

recorded on an attached label. Peel off

the label and attach it to the designated

area on the Security Card supplied in the

vehicle literature pack. Keep the Security

Card safe, but not in the vehicle.

JAG0064G

Keys and Remote Controls

USING THE REMOTE CONTROL

The remote handset,Jaguar Smart Key,

allows the vehicle to be unlocked and the

engine to be started without the use of an

ignition key - Keyless Starting, see page

50.

1. Unlocks and disarms the vehicle.

Central unlocking

One press: Unlocks all doors

and the luggage compartment.

The direction indicators will flash twice.

Two stage unlocking

One press: Unlocks the driver’s door and

the luggage compartment. The direction

indicators will flash twice (in certain

markets two audible warnings will be

emitted).

Two presses (within three seconds):

Unlocks the passenger door.

Note: Changing from central locking to

two stage locking and back again can be

carried out by pressing the lock and

unlock buttons simultaneously for four

seconds or via the touch-screen, see

page 46. The directional indicators will

flash twice to confirm that the change has

been carried out.

Press and hold the button to globally

open the vehicle windows, if enabled, see

page 47. Press and hold opens all

windows as well as the programmed door

opening.

2. Locks and arms the vehicle.

First press (if vehicle is

unlocked and disarmed:

Locks all doors, luggage

compartment and sets the alarm system.

The direction indicators will flash once.

3. Releases the luggage compartment

lock.

When the vehicle alarm system

is armed and the luggage

compartment only is opened,

the door and hood security is still active.

The doors will remain locked and armed.

See page 43.

4. Activates the convenience headlamp

feature.

One press switches on

headlamps. The headlamps will

remain on for 25 seconds, or

until the button is pressed again, or until

the engine START/STOP button is

pressed.

JAG0065G

4 3 2

Keys and Remote Controls

5. Activates the panic alarm.

Press the button three times

within three seconds.

The alarm is stopped by:

•Pressing the button again three times

within three seconds.

•Inserting the Jaguar Smart Key into

the starter control unit, see page 37.

•The vehicle detecting a valid Jaguar

Smart Key when the START/STOP

button is pressed.

Note: The panic alarm cannot be

cancelled within the first 5 seconds of the

alarm activating.

6. Emergency key blade.

To use the emergency key blade see

page 45.

7. Emergency key blade release button.

To extract: press the release button and

hold while withdrawing the key blade.

To insert: press and hold the button and

push the key blade into the Jaguar Smart

Key transmitter housing.

To extract: press the release button and

hold while withdrawing the key blade.

The key blade operates the door lock on

the left-hand side of the vehicle, the

luggage compartment lock and glove

compartment lock, see page 45.

Care of the remote handset

Do not expose to extremes of heat, dust,

humidity or allow contact with fluids. Do

not leave the transmitter exposed to

direct sunlight.

JAG0075G

Keys and Remote Controls

Irregular remote control operation

If difficulty is experienced with remote

keyless entry, passive entry, passive

starting or Jaguar Smart Key operation, it

may be caused by:

•internal battery low voltage and

therefore the battery should be

replaced, see page 40, or

•high levels of localised external

electrical interference e.g. radio

transmitter.

Until the battery can be replaced, or until

the vehicle is outside the local electrical

interference zone, the Jaguar Smart Key

must be inserted into the starter control

unit.

1. Lift the lid of the centre console

stowage compartment.

2. Slide open the cover of the starter

control unit.

3. Insert the Jaguar Smart Key into the

recess with the emergency key

release button facing forward.

To remove the Jaguar Smart Key from the

starter control unit:

1. Ensure that the vehicle is at rest with

the gear selector in the P position and

the engine not running.

2. Carefully depress the Jaguar Smart

Key and release. The key will eject into

its rest position.

3. Remove the Jaguar Smart Key from

the starter control unit.

Note: This is not a Jaguar Smart Key

internal battery recharging procedure. The

battery is non-rechargeable.

JAG0066G

JAG0061G

Keys and Remote Controls

Message centre information displays

Message Warning

Light

Priority

Indicator

Meaning

SMART KEY NOT

FOUND, PLEASE

INSERT IN SLOT

None None The Jaguar Smart Key has not

been detected, insert into the

starter control unit, see page 37.

CHECK SMART KEY None None Check that the Jaguar Smart Key

is in the vehicle.

WRONG SMART KEY

FOUND

None None The Jaguar Smart Key detected

by the in-vehicle systems is not

the one belonging to the vehicle.

REMOVE SMART KEY None None Remove the Jaguar Smart Key

from the starter control unit.

Keys and Remote Controls

Jaguar Smart Key system transmitters

!WARNING:

Any person fitted with an implanted

pacemaker should ensure that the

pacemaker is kept at a distance of at

least 22 cm (8.7 inches) away from any

transmitter mounted in the vehicle.

This is to avoid any possibility of

interference between the system and

pacemaker.

1. Cabin front transmitter.

2. Keyless vehicle module.

3. Cabin rear transmitter.

4. Exterior door handle transmitters.

5. Luggage compartment interior

transmitter.

6. Luggage compartment exterior

transmitter.

JAG0543G

Keys and Remote Controls

CHANGING THE REMOTE

CONTROL BATTERY

Battery renewal

When the battery needs renewing there

will be a significant decrease in the

effective range of the key transmitter and

the message SMART KEY BATTERY

LOW is displayed on the message centre.

To renew the battery, follow the

procedure below:

1. Remove the key blade from the

Jaguar Smart Key, see page 36.

2. Remove the two side covers, one at a

time, by inserting a small, flat blade,

screwdriver between the cover and

body and lightly twist the screwdriver.

3. Insert a small, flat bladed, screwdriver

between the two body halves of the

remote control. Apply light pressure

to the screwdriver and separate the

two halves.

4. Remove the printed circuit board,

taking care not to touch the battery

terminals. Remove the old battery and

dispose of it safely.

5. Fit a new battery cell, type CR2032

(available from your Jaguar Dealer),

with the side marked with the positive

symbol (+) downwards in the battery

receptacle. Avoid touching the new

battery as moisture/oil from the

fingers can reduce the life of the

battery and corrode the contacts.

Refit the parts in the reverse order

ensuring that they click securely into

place.

JAG0555G

Locks

KEYLESS ENTRY

The Keyless Entry function operates in

the following manner:

Central locking:

1. As a door handle is operated, the

vehicle emits a search signal.

2. As long as the Jaguar Smart Key is

within approximately 1.0m (3 feet 3

inches) of the operated door handle,

the signal will be acknowledged.

Note: The Jaguar Smart Key requires

only to be on the driver’s person or in

a bag or a non-metallic briefcase; it

does not require to be exposed or

handled.

3. The vehicle accepts the valid

response and allows access via either

door. The direction indicators will

flash twice (in certain markets two

audible warnings will be emitted).

Note: You are unlikely to notice a

time lag during this momentary

process.

Two stage unlocking: Access to the

vehicle is via the first door handle

operated. The other door can be opened

by releasing the internal door lock or via

operating the exterior door handle with a

Jaguar Smart Key present.

Note: Changing from central locking to

two stage locking and back again can be

simply carried out by pressing the lock

and unlock buttons simultaneously for

four seconds. The directional indicators

will flash twice to confirm the change.

Jaguar Smart Key check

When the last open door is closed, the

vehicle will perform a search of the vehicle

interior for the Jaguar Smart Key. If one is

not found a message SMART KEY NOT

FOUND, PLEASE INSERT IN SLOT will

be displayed for four seconds on the

message centre. This is to alert the driver

that the Jaguar Smart Key may have been

inadvertently removed from the vehicle.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

!WARNING:

The door windows partially lower and

raise automatically when the door is

opened and closed. Keep fingers away

from the windows when closing the

door. Closing an electrically operated

window on fingers, hands or any

vulnerable part of the body, can result

in serious injury.

Note: It will not be possible to lock the

vehicle if any door, hood or luggage

compartment is ajar or the inertia switch

has been tripped, see page 223. An

audible warning will be emitted.

JAG0068G

Locks

Convenience Mode

As the door is opened, the vehicle’s

electrical system initiates the

convenience mode. The following

systems become functional:

•memory

•seat and steering column adjustment

•interior and exterior lighting

•message centre

•cigar lighter and power socket.

Door external lock operation - with

Keyless Entry

Note: The keyless locking system will only

activate if the remote handset is outside

the vehicle.

To lock the vehicle and set alarm

1. Press the button on the door handle

once, or;

2. Use the Jaguar Smart Key.

Note: The vehicle will not lock

automatically.

Anti-slam locking

This feature helps prevent locking the

remote handset in the vehicle.

If either the driver’s or passenger’s door is

open and an attempt is made to lock the

doors using the interior locking levers, the

doors will not lock, due to a mechanical

inhibitor.

The vehicle can be locked using the

touch-screen lock, the remote handset

(when outside the vehicle) when all the

doors are closed.

Door external lock operation - without

Keyless Entry

Press the remote control lock button 1 or

use the emergency key blade 2, see page

45.

JAG0069L

JAG0520G

Locks

Door interior lock operation

To lock: Press the door release lever

inwards to lock both doors and luggage

compartment.

To unlock: Pull the door release lever.

Drive-away door locking

This feature locks all the doors and

luggage compartment if they are

unlocked when the gear selector is

moved out of the P position and the

vehicle is moving forward at the set speed

of above 7 km/h (5 mph).

Drive-away locking can be disabled or

reinstated by use of the touch-screen, if

required, see page 46.

Luggage compartment locking and

unlocking

All vehicles

The luggage compartment can be opened

by:

•Pressing the luggage compartment

release switch 1 on the facia

switchpack.

•Pressing the luggage compartment

release button 2 on the remote

handset.

Note: If the vehicle is armed the alarm

will not activate, but will re-arm when

the luggage compartment lid is closed

again.

•With the vehicle unlocked, press the

release button 3 on the luggage

compartment lid. However, it will be

inhibited if the valet mode is set.

JAG0071L

JAG0073L

Locks

•The key blade can be used to open

the luggage compartment release

lock 4, located behind the number

plate, but this will cause the alarm to

sound.

Caution: If the luggage compartment is

opened after the driver and passenger

doors are locked, ensure the Jaguar

Smart Key remains outside the vehicle

when it is closed again.

Vehicles without Keyless Entry

If the Jaguar Smart Key is inadvertently

left inside the vehicle, you will be locked

out. You should contact your Jaguar

Dealer.

Vehicles with Keyless Entry

Caution: If the Jaguar Smart Key is

inadvertently left inside the vehicle, an

audible alarm will sound and the

luggage compartment lid will re-open

after three seconds.

Note: If the Jaguar Smart Key is placed in

a metal container, it will not be detected.

All Jaguar Smart Keys must be removed

from the vehicle before locking.

Luggage compartment emergency

release

Your vehicle is equipped with a

mechanical interior luggage compartment

release handle that provides a means of

escape for children and adults in the

event they become locked inside the

luggage compartment.

Adults are advised to familiarise

themselves with the operation and

location of the release handle.

The T-shaped handle is located on the

luggage compartment lid, coupe 1 and

convertible 2.

To open the luggage compartment lid

from the inside, pull the T-shaped handle

and push up the lid. The material that the

handle is made of will glow for hours in the

darkness of the luggage compartment

following brief exposure to ambient light.

JAG0062N

Locks

Ensure that the T-shaped handle is firmly

returned to its stowed position after use.

!WARNING:

•Keep vehicle doors and the luggage

compartment locked and keep keys

out of a child’s reach. Unsupervised

children could lock themselves in

an open compartment and risk

injury. Children should be taught

not to play in vehicle.

•On hot days, the temperature in the

luggage compartment and the

vehicle interior can rise very

quickly. Exposure of people or

animals to these high temperatures

for even a short time can cause

death or serious heat-related

injuries, including brain damage.

Small children are particularly at

risk.

Emergency key blade operation

Remove the left-hand door handle key

lock cover by inserting the key blade into

the rectangular hole on the underside of

the cover.

Push up and twist the key blade to release

the cover retaining clips. Insert the key

blade into the exposed lock.

Note: Ensure that the emergency key

blade is kept safely at all times.

To lock the vehicle

Turn the key blade towards the front of

the vehicle and release.

This will lock the doors and the luggage

compartment, but will not arm the vehicle.

Unlocking

To unlock the vehicle

Turn the key blade towards the rear of the

vehicle and release. This unlocks the

left-hand side door and the luggage

compartment and turns on the interior

lights for two minutes at ¾ brightness.

When the vehicle is unlocked in this

manner, and a door is opened, this will

activate the full alarm. To disarm the

vehicle, press the Jaguar Smart Key

unlock button or stow it in the starter

control unit, see page 37, or press the

engine START/STOP button.

The direction indicators give two flashes

(in certain markets two audible warnings

will be given).

Valet mode

Valet mode allows the vehicle to be

parked by a parking attendant who can

lock the vehicle after parking, but cannot

open the luggage or glove compartments.

The key blade is used to lock the glove

compartment. The touch-screen sets the

valet mode for securing the luggage

compartment, see PROGRAMMING THE

REMOTE CONTROL on page -46.

JAG0076G

Locks

PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE

CONTROL

The remote handset, Jaguar Smart Key,

and various features of the vehicle

security system can be programmed to

your individual requirements by use of the

touch-screen.

The programmable features are as

follows:

•drive-away locking

•central or two stage locking

•sensor override

•window global open or close, passive

entry vehicles only

•valet key mode.

Selecting drive-away locking

From the main Home touch-screen

menu, select Vehicle:

1. Select Veh. settings.

2. The Security button is selected

automatically as the default.

3. Scroll down to - Drive away locking -

and select either On or Off.

Vehicle

Security

Parking

Valet mode

2 stage unlock Off On

Intrusion/tilt Off On

Vehicle

Security

Parking

Valet mode

Off On

Global close Off On

Off On

Global open

Drive away

locking

12 : 26 pm

JAG0526NAS

Locks

Selecting central or two stage locking

From the main Home touch-screen

menu, select Vehicle:

1. Select Veh. settings.

2. The Security button is selected

automatically as the default.

3. Select: - 2 stage unlock - On or Off.

Valet mode

From the main Home touch-screen

menu, select Vehicle:

1. Select Veh. settings.

2. The Security button is selected

automatically as the default.

3. Select Valet mode.

4. Enter a four digit Personal

Identification Number (PIN)

(personally chosen) by touching the

digit screen pad. On completion

touch the OK button. The screen

indicates that the PIN has been

accepted by displaying Valet on. If

you wish to cancel the PIN, touch the

C button at any time during entering

the number.

•Using the key blade, lock the glove

box.

•The luggage compartment is now

securely locked in the valet mode.

•On exiting and securing the vehicle,

hand the Jaguar Smert Key, less the

key blade, to the attendant.

Note: Ensure that the emergency key

blade is kept safely at all times.

De-selecting valet mode: When entry

into the vehicle has been gained, access

the Valet mode screen.

Vehicle

Security

Parking

Valet mode

2 stage unlock Off On

Intrusion/tilt Off On

12 : 26 pm

JAG0525NAS

Valet off - enter pin

Vehicle

Security

Parking

Valet mode

12 3

45 6

78 9

12 : 26 pm

JAG0079NAS

Locks

1. Enter your four digit PIN and touch the

OK button. The screen will indicate

that your PIN has been accepted by

displaying Valet off.

2. The luggage compartment will return

to the previously set security

requirement.

3. Unlock the glove box using the key

blade.

4. Insert the key blade into the Jaguar

Smart Key.

Note: If the PIN number has been

forgotten, the luggage compartment can

be unlocked by using the key blade in the

luggage compartment lock. This will

cancel the valet mode, see page 43.

Valet on - enter pin

Vehicle

Security

Parking

Valet mode

12 3

45 6

78 9

12 : 26 pm

JAG0080NAS

Alarm

ARMING THE ALARM

Some items may not be available, contact

your Jaguar Dealer if you are unsure.

Passive arming of the automatic alarm

system, can be programmed by a Jaguar

Dealer. This ensures that the security

system arms itself 30 seconds after the

doors, hood and luggage compartment

are closed following removal of the

remote handset from the vehicle.

Standard alarm features cover the

perimeter sensing of hood, doors and

luggage compartment.

Note: Passive arming does not lock the

doors.

Alarms and audible signals

Note: In certain markets, legislation

prohibits the use of audible confirmation

signals.

Audible signals

Two audible warnings (error signal) will

sound if an attempt is made to lock the

vehicle if a door, hood or luggage

compartment is not fully closed.

Full alarm

Once armed, any of the following

circumstances will create a full alarm

state, sound the siren or horns and flash

the direction indicators:

•opening a door, luggage

compartment (except with remote

handset) or hood

•using a remote handset in the starter

control unit which is not programmed

to the vehicle.

Remote headlight convenience

By pressing the remote handset

transmitter button with the dipped

headlight symbol once, the headlights will

come on for 25 seconds, unless the

headlight button is pressed again, or if the

engine START/STOP button key pressed.

DISARMING THE ALARM

Using the remote control

See page 35 and 41.

Using the key blade

See page 45.

PANIC ALARM

When in or near the vehicle, the panic

alarm can be set off to deter a possible

offender.

Pressing the panic button on the remote

handset transmitter three times within

three seconds will activate the panic

alarm.

The alarm is stopped by inserting the

remote handset in the starter control unit

or by pressing the panic button on the key

transmitter three times within three

seconds or holding the panic button

down for three seconds.

Note: The panic alarm is not functional if

the ignition system is ON.

JAG0081G

Starting the Engine

Chapter 2

KEYLESS STARTING

!WARNING:

Before starting the engine, check the

parkbrake is ON and the gear selector

is in position P.

With the brake pedal depressed, press

the START/STOP button to start the

engine. All systems will become

functional.

Note: If the fuel system inertia switch has

been tripped, the ignition system will be

isolated, see page 223.

If the engine persistently fails to start,

press the START/STOP button to turn the

ignition system back to convenience

mode. Slowly depress the accelerator

pedal fully, hold it in this position and

press the START/STOP button with the

brake pedal applied, the engine will start

to crank. Release the accelerator pedal

when the engine starts.

Note: If the Jaguar Smart Key is placed in

the door pocket it will be outside the

range of the sensors when the door is

opened.

When pressing the engine START/STOP

button to start the engine, if the security

status light, on the top surface of the

instrument panel, remains flashing, a fault

condition is indicated. Seek qualified

assistance as soon as possible.

Ignition system ON, non-engine start

To turn on the ignition system without

starting the engine, press the

START/STOP button without pressing the

brake pedal. All systems will become

functional.

Rolling re-start

If the engine is switched off while the

vehicle is moving, a rolling re-start can be

initiated by selecting neutral, N, and

pressing the engine START/STOP button.

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE

Caution: Never switch OFF the engine

whilst the vehicle is in motion.

With the gear selector in position P, press

the engine START/STOP button. The

engine will stop and the electrical system

will return to the convenience mode. The

audio, telephone and touch-screen

systems will revert to stand-by mode.

Pressing the START/STOP button again

will activate the systems.

JAG0503N

Engine Immobiliser

CODED KEYS

This vehicle is equipped with a Passive

Anti-Theft System (PATS) which prevents

it from being driven away by an

unauthorised person.

A sophisticated decoding process is used

to validate the Jaguar Smart Key. The

engine can only be started by the key that

is programmed to the vehicle electronic

systems.

Driving Hints

Driving Hin ts

RUNNING-IN

Apart from a few precautionary

recommendations, there are no strict

running-in procedures for this vehicle.

By observing the following advisory

precautions you will ensure maximum

engine, transmission and brake life for

your vehicle:

Engine

•Allow the engine to reach operating

temperature before operating at

engine speeds over 3500 rev/min.

•Vary the speed frequently.

•From 1500 kilometres (940 miles)

onwards, gradually increase

performance of the vehicle up to the

permitted maximum speed.

Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of oil consumption is

normal. The rate of consumption will

depend on the following:

•The quality and viscosity of the oil.

•Climatic conditions.

•The speed at which the engine is

being operated.

•Road conditions.

Drivers should expect above normal

consumption when the engine is new, and

after running-in if high speeds are

sustained.

Brakes

To ensure that brake pads reach their

optimum wear and performance

condition, usually within 480 kilometres

(300 miles), observe the following points

are recommended.

•Where possible, avoid heavy braking

as this can result in damage to the

brake pads and discs.

•Avoid prolonged use of the brakes, for

example, when descending severe

gradients.

•Frequent light application of the

brakes is desirable. This helps to fully

bed-in the brake pads.

Final drive unit

During the first 1500 kilometers (940

miles):

•Avoid full throttle applications and do

not exceed 190 km/h (120 mph).

Observe the national speed limits in

the country in which you are travelling.

•Do not participate in motor racing

events, test track days, sports driving

schools or similar for the first 8000

kilometers (4975 miles), also see page

161.

Steering Wheel

ADJUSTING THE STEERING

WHEEL

!WARNING:

Do not adjust the steering wheel whilst

driving.

Caution: Do not use steering wheel

mounted security devices since

movement of the steering wheel in

entry or exit mode could result in

damage to the vehicle (e.g. the

windshield) or possible injury to the

occupant.

The steering wheel can be adjusted for tilt

and reach.

1. Turn the switch to the COLUMN or

AUTO position 1.

2. Move the switch forwards or

backwards to adjust reach.

3. Move the switch up or down to adjust

tilt.

Three steering wheel positions may be

stored and recalled by the driver position

memory system, refer to Memory Setting

on page 139.

The message centre will indicate which

switch position has been selected by

displaying the message COLUMN

ADJUST or COLUMN ADJUST AUTO.

Entry and exit mode

Entry and exit mode provides automatic

movement of the steering column to allow

easier entry to or exit from the vehicle.

Entry and exit mode is selected by setting

the steering column adjustment switch to

the AUTO position 2.

Exit: - If the ignition system is in the

convenience mode position and the

driver’s door is opened, the steering

column will move to the uppermost tilt

position, unless already in that position.

Entry: - When the door is closed and the

Start button is pressed, the steering

column will return to the previous

position.

Notes on entry and exit mode

operation

•If the steering column switch is moved

away from AUTO whilst the steering

column is tilted away, the steering

column will move back to its previous

position when the driver’s door is

closed and the Start button is

pressed.

•If the steering column is adjusted

during entry and exit operation,

steering column movement will stop.

JAG0040G

Steering Wheel

HORN

The dual tone horn is operated by

pressing the centre pad on the steering

wheel.

The horn also operates as a warning horn

if the vehicle alarm system is activated.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL

The heated steering wheel is activated via

the touch-screen main Home screen.

With the engine running, press the

steering wheel icon for heating either ON

or OFF.

The heated steering wheel can also be

activated via the Climate Control main

screen by pressing the steering wheel

icon for heating either ON or OFF while

the engine is running.

JAG0113G

Home

Audio

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

Valet

71 70

F F

.5 .0

Radio

90.7 FM1

KALX

12 : 26 pm

JAG0115NAS

Settings

Temp. sync.

External

Auto

Left Right

71 70

F .0 F

Auto

Econ

Climate

Auto

Climate

12 : 26 pm

JAG0117NAS

Steering Wheel

AUDIO CONTROL

1. Increase or decrease volume.

2. Cycle through preset radio stations or

next CD track. A short press will seek

up or down to next preset station or

next CD track. Press and hold for two

seconds to select next strong radio

station or next CD.

3. Cycle through radio FM, AM and CD

changer. Press and hold for two

seconds to select Phone Ready

mode.

4. Select mute or answer phone call

when ringing.

CRUISE CONTROL

The cruise (speed) control system can be

used by the driver to maintain a selected

vehicle speed40 km/h (25 mph) for 2.5-

and 3.0-litre vehicles, and 28 km/h (18

mph) for 2.0-litre petrol and diesel

vehicles, without the driver having to use

the accelerator.

Controls on the steering wheel allow the

driver manual control of the system.

1. SPEED ADJUSTMENT CONTROL:

The thumb wheel is used to engage

cruise control initially. It is also used to

increase or decrease the set speed.

2. CANCEL: cancels cruise control but

retains the set speed in memory.

3. RESUME: engages cruise control

after it has been cancelled.

For more information about cruise

control, see page 169.

For information about adaptive cruise

control, see page 173.

JAG0034G

1 2

4 3

JAG0035G

Wipers and Washers

WINDSHIELD WIPERS

The windshield wipers and screen wash

functions are controlled by the right-hand

column stalk and only operate with the

ignition system ON.

Note:

•

Do not operate the wipers on a dry

screen.

•

In freezing or very hot conditions,

ensure that the blades are not stuck to

the glass.

•

In winter, remove any snow or ice from

around the arms and blades, including

the wiped area of the of the windshield

and the heater air intakes. If the wiper

blades have stuck to the glass, an

electronic cut-out may temporarily

prevent the wiper motor from

operating. If this occurs, switch OFF

the wiper and the ignition system.

Clear the obstruction and try again.

The stalk functions are as follows when

placed in the shown positions:

1. Windshield wipers off and parked.

2. Intermittent wipe.

3. Normal speed wipe.

4. Fast speed wipe.

5. Intermittent wipe rotary collar.

Intermittent wipe

When intermittent wipe 2 is selected, the

delay between wipes can be varied by

turning the rotary collar 5 to the required

delay position. Rain sensor wiper

operation is selected by turning the collar

to AUTO.

Note: If configured, the delay period for

each collar position (excluding AUTO),

automatically increases and decreases

with vehicle speed.

Flick wipe

Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel

for a single wipe. Holding the column

switch in this position will operate the

wipers continuously at normal speed until

released.

JAG0050G

JAG0124G

JAG0123G

Wipers and Washers

Speed dependant mode

If speed dependant mode is configured,

the operation of all wiper modes will be

affected by the vehicle speed.

Speed dependant mode becomes active

when the wipers are operating and the

vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph). If

the vehicle subsequently becomes

stationary, the wiper automatically

change to the next lowest operating

speed. When the vehicle starts moving

again, the original wiper speed setting is

automatically restored.

Speed dependant mode can be

configured at your Jaguar Dealer.

RAIN SENSOR

Caution:

•Ensure that AUTO is not selected

when entering a car wash or

damage to the wiper blades or arms

can occur as they will operate in the

car wash.

•During frosty conditions ensure

that AUTO is not selected before

operating the ignition system as

damage to the wiper blades can

occur when the windshield is

frozen.

When AUTO (turn the rotary collar 5 to

AUTO) and intermittent wipe 2 are

selected, the wipers will automatically

operate when rain falls on to the

windshield, or when moisture is present.

For the wipers to operate, the ignition

system must be in the ON position.

Note: When starting a journey with a wet

windshield, the rain sensing wipers may

not operate immediately when the ignition

system is switched ON. Therefore, a flick

wipe should be used to clear the

windshield of any moisture.

Note: Some States require headlights to

be ON when wipers are in use.

CHECKING THE WIPER

BLADES

Windshield wiper blades – clean and

inspect

Grease, silicone and gasoline-based

products impair the blade’s wiping

capability.

Lift the wiper blades clear of the

windshield and wipe the blades with a

clean, soft cloth moistened with water to

which a mild liquid detergent has been

added.

If signs of hardness or cracking in the

rubber are found, or if the wipers leave

streaks or unwiped areas on the

windshield during use, then the wiper

blades should be replaced.

Note: The wiper arms have a restricted lift

of 10 degrees.

Use Jaguar Screen Clean Paste to

remove contamination from the

windshield to ensure effective wiping or if

smearing or juddering becomes evident.

A more aggressive cleaning agent may be

required to remove stubborn

contamination. You should contact a

Jaguar Dealer for advice.

Wipers and Washers

CHANGING THE WIPER

BLADES

Only fit replacement wiper blades that are

identical to the original specification.

Lift the locking tab to release the blade

assembly and slide the wipe assembly off

the end of the wiper arm. Carefully

replace the wiper arm assembly to its

stowed position.

To replace the wiper blade, position the

wiper arm into the aperture in the middle

of the new blade assembly and fully

locate the blade into the wiper arm. Push

the lock tab firmly into position so that the

wiper blade is locked into the wiper arm.

WINDSHIELD WASHERS

Program wash and wipe

Timed jet function: If timed jet function is

configured, the windshield washer jets

(located on the wiper arms) only spray on

the up stroke of the wiper arms. This

function can be configured at your Jaguar

Dealer.

With the stalk in the OFF or intermittent

position, the program wash and wipe

sequence is activated by pushing the

button on the end of the column switch.

Short press: The wipers will perform five

normal speed wipes, followed by a drip

wipe. The washer jets will spray on the

first two wipes.

Extended press: The wipers and

washers will operate continuously at

normal speed until the button is released.

When released, the wipers will complete

their current wipe and then complete

three further wipes, followed by a drip

wipe.

Drip wipe: If drip wipe is configured,

following completion of the program wash

and wipe cycles, the wipers will pause for

four seconds then complete a drip wipe to

clear any remaining drips from the

windshield.

This function can be configured at your

Jaguar Dealer.

JAG0461L

JAG0125G

Wipers and Washers

Washer

If normal or fast wipe is selected, pressing

the program wash and wipe button will

operate the washer jets.

•Short press: The washer jets spray for

two wipes.

•Extended press: The washer jets

spray until the button is released or a

10 second timer has elapsed.

Note: If the button is pressed during the

up-stroke of the wipers, the washer jets

may spray for the completion of that wipe,

prior to spraying for the required number

of wipes or duration.

If the rotary collar is set to AUTO, the

wipers will operate until no moisture is

detected.

Note: If the low washer fluid warning is

ON, the windshield wipers will not operate

when program wash and wipe is activated

even though there may be washer fluid

remaining in the reservoir and sprayed

onto the screen. This is to prevent

damage to the blades, scratching of the

glass, or smearing dirt across the screen.

Flick wiper, normal or fast operation, can

be selected to clear any spray from the

windshield.

HEADLAMP WASHERS

Note: Telescopic headlamp powerwash

units are contained within the front

headlamp units.

If the ignition system is in the ON position,

dipped beam headlamps are switched

ON and there is sufficient fluid in the

washer reservoir, pressing the program

wash and wipe button will also operate

the headlamp powerwash; directing two

short bursts of washer fluid onto the

headlamps.

After the first headlight powerwash

operation, the headlight powerwash will

operate on every fourth press of the

program wash and wipe button, provided

that the headlamps are still switched ON

and a 10 minute timer has elapsed since

the last headlamp powerwash.

Note:

•

The powerwash sequence is reset

when the headlamps or ignition is

turned OFF and ON again.

•

The headlamp powerwash function is

inhibited when the low washer fluid

warning is on.

Lighting

GENERAL INFORMATION

Active front lighting system (AFL)

Active Front Lighting (AFL) is designed to

give the driver improved visibility under

varying driving conditions.

The illustration shows the light spread of a

vehicle NOT FITTED with AFL 1 and a

vehicle FITTED with AFL 2.

The main light source consists of

bi-functional (high and low beam) xenon

projector units.

The projector units are swivelled left or

right to improve the light spread on bends

in the road.

Bi-Xenon lights 3 provide significantly

improved visibility over halogen lights 4.

They also react dynamically in the vertical

plane to the vehicle’s braking or

acceleration to maximise headlamp

performance.

The units operate when the engine is

running and the master lighting switch set

to headlamps, see page 71, or AUTO, if

the ambient light has fallen below a preset

level.

The system takes inputs from the

vehicle’s road speed, steering angle to

determine the amount of horizontal

swivel. The amount of swivel is highest at

low speed, manoeuvring speeds and

reduces as speed increases.

If reverse gear is selected, the lamps

return to the central position and the

swivelling capability is disabled.

When the engine is started, the

headlamps can be seen to swivel as they

initiate a self-calibration cycle for a few

seconds.

JAG0126L

JAG0128L

100

Lighting

Cornering or static bending lamps

Additional lighting comes from the

cornering or static bending lamps which

are angled outwards from the centre line

of the vehicle.

These lamps broaden the beam of the

headlamps when cornering during normal

night driving.

The illustration shows the light spread of a

vehicle NOT FITTED 1 with static bending

lamps and a vehicle FITTED 2 with static

bending lamps.

The system switches on the lamp if it has

received an input from the vehicle’s

direction indicator. As the system is

ignition based, the lamp will not stay on

even if the vehicle is parked with the

direction indicator lever in the operating

position.

Only the lamp on the same side as the

operating direction indicator illuminates.

Note: Excessive rotation of the steering

wheel while the ignition system is in the

OFF position may cause incorrect

calibration of the static bending lamps. In

extreme situations the lamps may operate

earlier than previously experienced.

However, correct calibration of the lamps

is automatically re-established within 30

seconds of the vehicle being driven.

JAG0130L

Lighting

LIGHTING CONTROL

Note: If the ignition system is OFF and the

lamps are left ON, the message centre will

display LIGHTS ON.

The exterior lamps are controlled by the

left-hand column stalk switch.

The rotary collar on the stalk has three

positions for turning the exterior lamps on

or off and positions for autolamps and exit

delay. These are:

OFF

All exterior lamps OFF (except vehicles

provided with daylight running lamps).

Sidelamps

Switches on front sidelamps, tail, number

plate and any other marker lamps

required by local legislation. When the

external lamps are ON the instruments

will also be lit.

Headlamps

With the ignition in convenience mode,

see page 42, this position switches on low

beam headlamps in addition to the lights

switched on in sidelamp position.

The left-hand column stalk switch has two

positions for controlling the high beam.

Pulling the switch towards the steering

wheel and releasing causes the high

beam to flash on and off. The high beam

can be flashed at any time when the

switch is pulled and will remain ON for as

long as the switch is held.

The second position is to switch high

beam headlamps ON. With the ignition

system ON, see page 50, first select low

beam lamps, and then push the column

light switch away from the steering wheel.

The blue warning light on the instrument

cluster and high beam headlamps will

come ON.

To turn high beam OFF, pull the column

switch towards the steering wheel to

return to low beam.

JAG0132G

JAG0133G

JAG0134G

JAG0135G

JAG0136G

Lighting

Note: If low beam is switched OFF, the

rotary controls switch is moved, with high

beam still activated, both low and high

beam will be extinguished. Both low and

high beam will illuminate if low beam is

turned on again.

Autolamps

A light sensor control, mounted on the

front of the facia, monitors exterior light

levels and automatically switches the

sidelamps and low beam headlamps ON

or OFF.

The ignition system must be ON for full

automatic light operation.

When light fades towards dusk, the

sidelamps and headlamps will switch ON

automatically.

At dawn, as light increases, the sidelamps

and headlamps switch OFF automatically.

Do not cover the sensor and keep the

windshield clean. Obstructing the light in

this area of the sensor may lead to

unwanted operation of the sidelamps and

headlamps.

Windshield wiper detection

(This function only operates when

autolamps is selected.) The sidelamps

and headlamps will switch ON

automatically if the windshield wipers are

switched ON for 20 seconds or more.

Once the windshield wipers are switched

OFF, the sidelamps and headlamps will

automatically switch OFF two minutes

later.

Autolamps with Exit Delay

Three settings on the rotary collar set the

time that the headlamps will remain on

after the driver’s door has closed:

•30 seconds.

•60 seconds.

•120 seconds.

The message centre will display the

change set delay AUTOLAMP DELAY

X:XX or AUTOLAMP DELAY OFF when

the autolamp delay function has been

turned OFF.

Note: If the light switch rotary collar is in

the AUTO position there will be no exit

delay and the headlamps will turn off

when the ignition system is OFF.

Door guard and puddle lamps

Door guard lamps are fitted to each door

to give warning of an open door to

passing vehicles. Puddle lamps illuminate

the step out area at night.

Each lamp comes on automatically when

the door is opened. If the door is left open

the lamps remain on for approximately 15

minutes after returning from convenience

mode to power off.

JAG0137G

JAG0138G

Lighting

Daylight running lights

(Canada only)

In certain countries it is a legal

requirement for the lights to be on during

the hours of daylight.

With the rotary collar in the OFF position,

low beam headlamps, sidelamps, tail,

license plate lamps and, where fitted, side

marker lamps will switch on automatically

with the following conditions:

•The ignition system is ON.

•The vehicle gear selector out of park.

•The parkbrake is not applied (is

released).

Cabin Lighting

1. Courtesy light and footwell lights.

2. Left and right-hand reading and map

lights.

3. Centre console illumination.

Interior lighting comprises, front overhead

courtesy lights, two front reading and

map lights and front puddle lights. Vanity

mirrors, glove compartment, footwell and

luggage compartment lights are also

provided.

Press the centre switch 1 in the front roof

console to turn the courtesy lights, puddle

lights and footwell lights on. A second

press turns the lights off. The lights also

operate to illuminate the vehicle interior

when a door is opened.

The interior courtesy light and footwell

lights can be de-activated by pressing

the centre switch for more than two

seconds. The courtesy light will flash,

then switch OFF.

The courtesy light and footwell light will

come on again when the light switch is

pressed again for more than two seconds.

The centre console area is illuminated by

a small light from the overhead console 3.

This is on whenever the sidelights are on

and can be controlled by the dimmer

switch.

Reading lighting

The reading and map lights are turned on

and off by individual switches, 2 on the

front overhead console.

Illuminated entry and exit

The interior lights will gradually illuminate

when a door is opened and go out when

the engine is started or approximately 30

seconds after the last door is closed. If

any door is left open, the lights will fade

off after approximately 15 minutes after

returning from convenience mode to

power OFF.

When the vehicle is unlocked the courtesy

lights will come on at maximum

brightness for approximately 30 seconds

if a door is not opened.

With the engine running, opening any

door will put on all interior lights, they will

go out immediately after the last door is

closed.

JAG0143G 2 1 2

Lighting

Glove compartment

The glove compartment will illuminate

when opened.

Luggage compartment lighting

The luggage compartment will be

illuminated when the lid is opened.

Battery saver

If the interior lights are switched on using

the centre switch in the overhead console

and the ignition switch is in convenience

mode, the lights will automatically turn

OFF after approximately 15 minutes after

returning from convenience mode to

power off.

If the interior lights are switched on by

opening a door, the lights will

automatically turn off after approximately

15 minutes after returning from

convenience mode to power off.

If the glove compartment lights, luggage

compartment lights, reading and

map lights or vanity lights are switched

on, and the ignition switch is in

convenience mode or the remote

handset is removed, the lights will

automatically turn OFF after

approximately 15 minutes after returning

from convenience mode to power off.

DIRECTION INDICATORS

The direction indicators operate when the

ignition system is ON.

The left column stalk has two positions for

indicating left or right turn.

The first position, moving the stalk up or

down, causes the indicator to flash while

it is held in this position.

Flicking the stalk will give a three flash

lane changing signal.

The second position is a full movement of

the stalk up or down to indicate for a right

or left turn, which can then be released.

The indicators will remain flashing and will

cancel when the turn is completed.

An audible ticking and a flashing green

arrow on the instrument cluster indicates

that the selected direction indicator is ON.

Note: Should a direction indicator bulb

fail, the corresponding side green warning

light will flash at twice the normal rate. The

audible ticking will sound at twice the

normal rate.

Lane change flash

Move the left column stalk partially up or

down against spring pressure, then

release, to indicate a lane change. The

relevant direction indicator flashes three

times.

JAG0139G

Lighting

If the stalk is held against spring pressure,

the direction indicators will continue to

operate until the stalk is released.

Lane change flash can be disabled or

enabled by a Jaguar Dealer.

FRONT FOG LAMPS

The fog lamps can only be switched on

when the ignition system is ON and when

sidelamp or low beam is selected.

With the lighting control switch in

sidelamp or low beam position, press the

switch 1 to turn on the front fog lamps.

Pushing the switch again will turn off the

front fog lamps.

Note: The front fog lamps should only be

used when visibility is severely restricted

by fog.

REAR FOG LAMP

The rear fog lamp can only be switched

on if the low beam headlamps are on or if

the sidelamps and front fog lamps are

switched on.

Press the switch 2 to turn on the rear fog

lamp. Pushing the switch again will turn

off the rear fog lamp.

Note:

•

Both front and rear fog lamps will be

turned off when the ignition system is

turned off, but will not be illuminated

when the ignition system is turned on

again.

•

The rear fog lamp should only be used

when visibility is severely restricted by

fog.

JAG0140L

Lighting

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The switch is in the centre console below

the touch-screen and operates with the

ignition ON or OFF. Use only in an

emergency to warn traffic of a vehicle

breakdown or approaching danger.

To operate: Press the switch; the

direction indicators, the instrument

cluster green indicators and audible

warning will operate in unison. The switch

icon will flash in unison with the

indicators.

To cancel: Press the switch again.

HEADLAMP LEVELLING

Auto headlight levelling

Automatic levelling of the headlamps is a

feature which avoids dazzling oncoming

drivers. A control unit adjusts the aim of

the lamps during acceleration,

deceleration and vehicle load conditions.

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS

When touring in right-hand traffic

countries, use the beam adjustment

mechanism located within each

headlamp unit to alter the beam pattern

accordingly.

When this is moved it enables the vehicle

to be driven in opposite hand drive

markets without having to stick blanking

decals onto the headlamp lens.

To adjust the headlamp:

1. Remove the headlamp unit, see page

78.

2. Twist anticlockwise and lift off the rear

headlamp unit cover.

3. Locate the adjustment lever, as

shown.

4. Move the lever fully downwards.

5. Refit the high beam cover and the

headlamp unit, see page 79.

Remember to place the levers back in

their original position when you have

returned to your country of origin.

JAG0142G

JAG0144G

Lighting

CHANGING A BULB

It is important that only the Jaguar

specified bulbs are used when renewing

bulbs.

The message centre will display a

message indicating which bulb requires

to be replaced.

Before renewing bulbs, switch off the

ignition system and light switches.

To change the bulbs within the headlamp

and taillamp, the complete units require to

be removed from the vehicle.

Note: In most countries it is illegal to use

a vehicle with a defective exterior lamp

bulb.

Headlight unit

!WARNING:

•Replacement or maintenance of

Xenon lights should be carried out

only by a Jaguar Dealer.

•Used Xenon lamp units contain

mercury which is hazardous and

can be injurious to health.

•Bi-Xenon lamp units operate at a

high temperature. If they have

recently been in use, allow

sufficient time for them to cool

down before touching them.

•The Xenon system generates up to

28,000 volts and contact with this

voltage could lead to a fatality.

Ensure that headlamps are

switched off before working on the

system.

Caution: Seek advice about proper

disposal of Bi-Xenon lamp units from

your Jaguar Dealer or your local

authority.

1. Side marker (bulb type WY5W).

2. Direction indicator (bulb type, front

3457AK, rear PY21Silver Vision).

3. Low and high beam projector unit

(bulb type D1S35W).

4. Sidelamp (bulb type W5W).

5. Cornering lamp (bulb type H8).

JAG0145G

21 3 4 5

Lighting

Removal of the headlamp unit

1. Remove the lower headlamp securing

bolt 1 located in the front of the wheel

arch. Turn the steering wheel to the

left, when removing the right-hand

headlamp and to the right when

removing the left-hand headlamp.

2. Open the hood and remove the upper

securing bolts 2.

3. Disconnect the headlamp powerwash

connector by pressing the button and

pulling the pipe apart 3, some washer

fluid may drain from the pipe when it

is disconnected.

4. Release the headlamp locating peg by

lifting the tongue upwards 4.

5. Carefully ease the headlamp unit

forward to gain access to the wiring

multi-plug connector. Release the

connector by pressing upwards on

the release button and pull the wiring

multi-plug from the headlamp 5. Place

the headlamp unit on a flat surface

covered in a soft material to prevent

damage to the unit’s lens.

JAG0146G

Lighting

Refitting the headlamp unit

1. Reconnect the wiring multi-plug

connector.

2. Offer up the unit into position.

3. Ensure that the locating peg is fitted

into the in-board locating hole.

4. To secure the headlamp unit, first

secure the wheel arch screw, then

repeat the removal procedure in the

reverse order, ensuring that the

powerwash pipe is reconnected.

Note: After the replacement of any bulb

and the fitting of the headlamp unit, the

aim of the headlamps should be checked

by a Jaguar Dealer.

Front side marker lamp

1. Remove the headlamp unit, see page

78.

2. Twist the bulb holder counter

clockwise and pull out the bulb

complete with the bulb holder.

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.

4. Insert the new bulb (WY5W) and

repeat the above procedure in reverse

order.

JAG0147G

JAG0148G

Lighting

Front direction indicator lamp

1. Remove the headlamp unit, see page

78.

2. Twist the bulb holder counter

clockwise and pull out the bulb

complete with the electrical

connector.

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.

4. Insert the new bulb (3457AK) and

repeat the above procedure in reverse

order.

Front sidelamp

1. Remove the headlamp unit, see page

78.

2. Twist and lift off the side domed cap.

3. Pull out the bulb complete with bulb

holder.

4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.

5. Insert the new bulb (W5W) and repeat

the above procedure in the reverse

order. Ensure that the cover is fitted

correctly to retain the water tightness.

JAG0122N

JAG0150G

Lighting

Dip and main beam projector unit

Caution: It is strongly advised that the

High Intensity Discharge (HID) Xenon

low and high beam projector unit

(D1S35W) is replaced by a Jaguar

Dealer.

1. Remove the headlamp unit, see page

78.

2. Twist and lift off the rear domed cap.

3. Twist the bulb unit counter clockwise

to unlock it. Pull the bulb unit clear of

the headlamp unit.

4. Press the electrical connector release

lever and disconnect the bulb unit.

5. Press the bulb unit adaptor ring catch

and remove the adaptor ring from the

bulb unit.

6. Secure the bulb unit adaptor ring onto

the new bulb (D1S35W) and repeat

the above procedure in the reverse

order. Ensure that the cover is fitted

correctly to retain the water tightness.

JAG0151G

Lighting

Cornering or static bending lamp

Caution: Halogen bulbs will be

damaged if touched by hand or

contaminated with oil or grease. It is

important to use clean gloves or lint

free cloth when handling a bulb which

is to be used again. A contaminated

bulb may be cleaned with methylated

spirit before refitting.

1. Remove the headlamp unit, see page

78.

2. Twist and lift off the side domed cap.

3. Twist the bulb holder counter

clockwise to unlock, then pull out the

bulb complete with electrical

connector.

4. To release the bulb unit, lift the two

catches of the electrical connector,

then pull to remove the bulb unit.

5. Insert the new bulb unit (H8) and

repeat the above procedure in the

reverse order. Ensure that the cover is

fitted correctly to retain the water

tightness.

Front fog lamp

It is recommended that the front fog lamp

bulb is renewed by a Jaguar Dealer.

Rear fog and reverse lamps

!WARNING:

LED lamp units operate at a high

temperature. If they have recently been

in use, allow sufficient time for them to

cool down before touching them.

These lamps are LED units and are

integral to the luggage compartment lid.

They should only be replaced by a Jaguar

Dealer.

JAG0152G

Lighting

License plate lamp

1. Insert a wide flat bladed suitable tool,

twist and lever the lens out of the

surround panel. Ensure that the lens

moves to the outer edge of the

surround panel to release the

securing tangs.

2. Twist and pull out the bulb holder

complete with bulb.

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.

4. Insert the new bulb (W5WL).

5. Refit the lens by locating the outboard

securing tangs first and then pressing

it firmly into the recess until it clicks.

Side repeater indicator

1. Push the lens firmly towards the rear

of the vehicle and withdraw the light

unit from the wing panel.

2. Twist to release the bulb holder from

the lens unit.

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.

4. Insert the new bulb (WY5W) and

repeat the above procedure in the

reverse order.

JAG0153G

JAG0154G

Lighting

Removal of the rear lamp unit

The rear lamp unit contains four lamp

bulbs and it is necessary to remove the

unit from the vehicle in order to change

any of the bulbs.

1. Open the luggage compartment. For

the right-hand side unit, detach the

interior light unit from the trim panel

(Convertible) or the vent trim panel

(Coupe) and remove the two rear lamp

unit securing nuts. For the left-hand

side unit, detach the vent trim panel

and remove the rear lamp unit

securing nut.

2. Firmly pull the rear lamp unit trim

panel from the vehicle.

3. Firmly pull the rear lamp unit away

from the vehicle and disconnect the

wiring multi-plug connector. Remove

the lamp unit from the vehicle and

place the unit on a flat surface

covered in a soft material to prevent

damage to the unit’s lens. Each bulb

is now accessible by twisting off its

bulb holder and removing the bulb,

see page 85.

4. Insert a new bulb and repeat the

above procedure in the reverse order.

JAG0155G

Lighting

Rear lamp unit replacement bulbs

1. Side marker, (W5W).

2. Direction indicator, (PY21W Silver

Vision).

3. Stop and Tail, (P21/5W).

4. Tail, (W5W).

JAG0156G

Windows and Mirrors

ELECTRIC WINDOWS

!WARNING:

•Before operating power windows

you should verify they are free of

obstructions and ensure that

children and or pets are not in the

proximity of window openings.

Failure to do so could result in

serious personal injury. It is the

primary responsibility of the

supervising adults to never leave a

child unattended in a vehicle.

•When raising windows ensure all

occupants are clear.

•When leaving the vehicle take the

ignition keys to prevent misuse of

the window switches by remaining

occupants, especially children.

Switches on the driver’s door controls

both the driver and passenger door

windows.

The passenger door is provided with a

switch to control that door window only.

The ignition system must to be ON to

operate the windows.

These switches will only operate the

windows for five minutes when the

ignition switch remains in the

convenience mode position and the

driver’s and passenger’s doors remain

closed.

Raise and lower

To lower a window, press and hold the

front of the switch until the desired

position is reached, then release.

To raise a window, pull up and hold the

front of the switch until the desired

position is reached, then release.

If the switches are held for longer than six

seconds, for example, when attempting

to overcome frozen or jammed windows,

the window drive will be switched off for a

few seconds to protect the window drive

motors.

One-touch operation

Each window has a one-touch facility

enabling the occupant to fully open or

close the window in one quick movement.

Press the switch briefly to close or open

the window in one movement. Window

travel can be stopped at any time by

pressing the switch again, but will then be

controlled by pressing and holding the

switch.

Automatic window drop for door

opening

The frameless door windows create a seal

against the convertible top or the roof

seals. If fully raised, the door windows will

drop partially when the door release lever

is operated, this is to allow easy door

opening. When the door is closed the

windows rise to the fully closed position.

JAG0160L

Windows and Mirrors

The doors must not be opened if power

for automatic window drop is not

available, e.g. with battery disconnected.

However, in an emergency the doors can

be opened with the windows fully up.

Window anti-trap protection

!WARNING:

•Careless closing of the windows

can override the protection

function and cause injuries.

•If the battery is disconnected or

discharged the window anti-trap

protection feature is lost. When the

battery is reconnected or

recharged the window anti-trap

protection system must be reset.

Each electrically operated window has a

anti-trap protection feature. If the upward

movement of the window detects an

obstacle the anti-trap detection system

will immediately stop the window closing,

then move it downwards for a short

distance.

Anti-trap protection override

!WARNING:

While the window is being closed for

the third time, the anti-trap detection

function is disabled. Make sure there

are no obstacles in the way of the

closing window.

The anti-trap protection will also stop the

window closing if a blockage or

resistance occurs e.g. in the window

guide channels.

Typically this might be due to icing in

winter but could also be caused by

damage or misalignment of the guide

channels or seals.

•After the initial attempt to close the

window and the anti-trap detection

has initiated, operate the close switch

a second time. This action must be

carried out within ten seconds.

•The window will attempt to close

again and operate the anti-trap

detection. The window will now close

again for the third time, but will only

operate by pressing and holding the

switch with the anti-trap detection

disabled. The window will now close

with full power. The icing in the seal

can now be broken and dispersed.

•Repeat the override action until the

window has closed. Each time the

window stops, the switch must be

operated immediately to initiate

further override action.

If this procedure fails to move the

blockage, the anti-trap detection feature

will be lost and must be reset after the

blockage has been cleared.

Reset window anti-trap protection

Ensure that the respective door is closed

and, if fitted, the convertible roof closed.

•Fully close the window, then release

the switch. Again pull the switch to

close the window and hold for two

seconds.

•Open the window fully and release the

switch. Again press the switch to

open the window and hold for two

seconds.

Windows and Mirrors

•Check to confirm the operation by

opening the window and then use one

touch operation to close the window.

•Repeat for the remaining electrically

operated windows.

Thermal overload

If the windows are repeatedly opened and

closed (e.g. by a child), a protection

system will de-activate window operation

for a short period to avoid overheating of

the window motors.

Caution: Do not close the door with the

windows fully up as damage to the

seals and the glass will occur.

Rear quarter window operation

(Convertible only)

The rear quarter windows operate

automatically in conjunction with

convertible roof opening or closing.

The rear quarter windows may also be

operated independently of the convertible

roof when the convertible roof is closed,

by means of the convertible roof switch

on the overhead console, as follows:

To lower: Press the rear of the switch for

less than a second and the rear quarter

windows will be driven down fully.

To raise: Press the front of the switch and

hold and the rear quarter windows will

rise for as long as the switch is held.

Notes on rear quarter window

operation:

1. When the convertible roof is opened

the rear quarter windows are

automatically lowered and cannot be

operated until the roof is closed.

When the roof is closed the rear

quarter windows are automatically

raised.

2. The rear quarter windows operate

together and cannot be operated

individually.

WINDOW TINTING

Caution: Do not have your vehicle

windows tinted with a metal oxide

tinting (for maximum heat reduction

from the sun) if you have a telephone or

navigation system fitted to your

vehicle.

Metal oxide tinting prevents the reception

of the Global Positioning System (GPS)

signals by the antenna, causing the

navigation system to stop functioning.

A nonmetal tinting should be used if you

require window tinting and if in doubt,

contact your Jaguar Dealer for advice.

JAG0162L

Windows and Mirrors

ELECTRIC EXTERIOR

MIRRORS

Caution: The right-hand mirror is

convex, providing a wider field of

vision. As a result, objects viewed in

the mirror are closer than they appear.

Both electrochromic door mirrors are

adjusted from the driver’s door

switchpack.

The four-way adjustment button 1 moves

the mirrors to the required position. The

selector button 2 selects the mirror to be

moved, L for the left-hand side mirror and

R for the right-hand side mirror.

The mirror housings are designed to pivot

against the vehicle upon impact.

Caution: If door mirrors have been

folded against the vehicle due to an

impact, reposition the mirrors

manually.

Mirror heating

Caution: Do not use a scraper to

remove ice from the mirrors as this will

damage the surface.

The door mirrors have heating elements

which operate automatically based on the

external ambient temperature of the

vehicle. The mirror heater will clear all ice

from the mirror surface.

Mirror dip when reversing

Reverse mirror dipping is selected via the

touch-screen.

From the main Home touch-screen

menu, select Vehicle:

•Select Veh. settings.

•The Security button is selected

automatically as the default.

•Select Parking.

•Select Reverse mirror dip ON.

When reverse gear is selected, the

passenger mirror inclines downwards to

provide a close up view of the rear side

area. When the gear selector is moved out

of reverse, the mirror will return to its

original position.

JAG0041L

2 1

mirror dip

Vol. presets

Off On

Vehicle

Security

Parking

Valet mode

Reverse

12 : 26 pm

JAG0165NAS

Windows and Mirrors

The reverse mirror dip alignment can be

adjusted by using the four-way

adjustment button 1 when the mirror has

completed movement to its reverse dip

position. This new selected position is

maintained until re-adjusted

Note: When reversing, if a speed of

greater than 7 km/h (4 mph) is achieved,

then the mirrors will revert to the previous

position. However, if the speed is then

reduced to below 7 km/h (4 mph), then the

mirrors will revert to the dipped position.

INTERIOR MIRROR

During night time driving with the ignition

switched on, the interior mirror will darken

automatically in proportion to the amount

of glare detected from a following

vehicle’s headlights.

When you shift the gear selector lever into

reverse, the interior mirror dimming

feature will be automatically switched off

for a clearer view whilst reversing.

Note:

•

Should a mirror assembly become

detached from the windshield, it must

be refitted by a Jaguar Dealer.

•

Ensure that the windshield in front of

the mirror is kept clean. Where fitted,

the moisture sensor for wiper

operation is located to the front of the

mirror casing. Any dirt may affect the

operation of this sensor.

•

The automatic darkening of the mirror

will not operate properly if the light

that would otherwise strike the mirror

is obstructed.

JAG0168L

Occupant Protection

Chapter 4

FASTENING THE SEAT BELTS

!WARNING:

•Seat belts are life saving

equipment. In a collision,

occupants not wearing a seat belt

can be thrown around inside, or

possibly thrown out of the vehicle.

This is likely to result in more

serious injuries than would have

been the case had a seat belt been

properly worn. It may even result in

loss of life.

•Make sure all occupants are

securely strapped in at all times -

even for the shortest journeys.

•Belts should not be worn with the

straps twisted.

•Always ensure that the webbing is

midway between the neck and the

edge of the shoulder.

•Each seat belt assembly must only

be used by one occupant; it is

dangerous to put a belt around a

child being carried on the

occupant’s lap.

•Do not try to put an adult seat belt

around two children.

•Seat belts are designed to bear

upon the bony structure of the body

and should be worn low across the

front of the pelvis or the pelvis,

chest and shoulders, as applicable;

wearing the lap section of the belt

across the abdominal area must be

avoided.

•Seat belts should be adjusted as

firmly as possible, consistent with

comfort, to provide the protection

for which they have been designed.

A slack belt will greatly reduce the

protection afforded to the wearer.

•Care should be taken to avoid

contamination of the webbing with

polishes, oils and chemicals, and

particularly battery acid. Cleaning

may safely be carried out using

mild soap and water.The belt

should be replaced if webbing

becomes frayed, contaminated or

damaged.

•It is essential to replace the entire

assembly after it has been worn in a

severe impact even if damage to

the assembly is not obvious.

•No modifications or additions

should be made by the user which

will either prevent the seat belt

adjusting devices from operating

to remove slack, or prevent the

seat belt assembly from being

adjusted to remove slack.

•Should the seat belt not retract and

remain at its static length, you

should consult your nearest Jaguar

Dealer immediately.

•Replacement and renewal of seat

belts should be carried out by

Jaguar Dealers only.

The use of front and rear seat belts is

mandatory in most countries. Using seat

belts saves lives.

Occupant Protection

!WARNING:

Do not adjust the seat belt while

driving.

Draw the tongue of the seat belt over the

shoulder, across the chest and push it

into the buckle unit slot 1. A positive click

indicates that it is safely locked.

The use of comfort clips or devices that

would create slackness in the seat belt

system is not advised.

Ensure that the webbing is midway

between the neck and the edge of the

shoulder. Correct tension is controlled by

automatic retraction of the reel.

Always wear seat belts without slack or

twists, since any slack in a seat belt

reduces the effectiveness of the belt and

the level of protection it can provide. For

optimum protection, the seat belts should

fit tightly around the body. Do not recline

the front seats excessively. Optimum

benefit is obtained from the seat belt with

the seat back angle set to no more than

30 degrees from the upright.

Note: If the vehicle is parked on unlevel

ground, the seat belt mechanism may

lock. This is not a fault, allow the seat belt

to retract a small amount before gently

easing the belt from its attachment to

unlock it.

Belt buckle release

To release the belt buckle, press the

release button 2 in the buckle unit and

guide the belt back up to the seat

mounted webbing guide.

Front occupants only: The front seat

belts are equipped with an automatic

webbing tension relieving device. This

device will reduce the webbing loads

experienced by the occupant when the

seat belt is correctly worn without

inducing any slack webbing.

The device is activated when, with the

ignition system ON and the seat belt

tongue engaged in the buckle, webbing is

extracted on occupant lean forward (a

series of clicks indicate the range of

movement with reduced tension).

If the engine is turned off with the seat

belts still fastened, a slight increase in

seat belt tension may be felt. This is

normal, it is part of the seat belt

assembly’s tension control device.

Front passenger seat belt -belt

tensioner sensor (Canada and USA

only)

The front passenger seat belt is fitted with

a belt tension sensor which is part of the

occupant classification sensor system,

for further information see page 96.

JAG0173G

Occupant Protection

Seat belt guide and retainer

To assist with both access and

positioning of the front seat belt webbing,

a guide-retainer is incorporated into each

front seat.

When the front seat back is tilted forward

to gain access to the rear of the vehicle it

is recommended that the seat belt is

removed from the guide.

On returning the front seat back to the

upright position ensure that the seat belt

is returned to the seat belt guide.

Inertia reel mechanism test

•With the seat belt fastened, give the

webbing near the buckle a quick

upward pull. The buckle must remain

securely locked.

•With the seat belt unfastened, unreel

the webbing to the limit of its travel.

Check that the unreeling is free from

snatches and snags and then allow

the belt to fully retract.

•Partially unreel the webbing, then

hold the tongue plate and give it a

quick forward pull. The mechanism

must lock automatically and prevent

any further unreeling.

If a seat belt should fail any of these

tests, contact your Jaguar Dealer.

SEAT BELT REMINDER

The belt reminder feature provides

additional reminder to the driver that an

occupant’s seat belt is unbuckled. A

chime will sound intermittently.

Note: Not all countries have the warning

chime.

Seat belt warning

A warning indicator on the

instrument panel is illuminated

when:

•The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.

•A passenger is sitting in the front seat

and their seat belt is not fastened.

In some countries a warning signal

sounds for six seconds.

JAG0174L

Occupant Protection

USING SEAT BELTS DURING

PREGNANCY

!WARNING:

Position the seat belt correctly for the

mother and unborn child. Never wear

just the lap strap and never sit on the

lap strap while using just the shoulder

strap. Both of these actions are

extremely dangerous and may increase

your risk of serious injury in the event

of an accident.

Position the lap strap comfortably across

the hips and low beneath the pregnant

abdomen. Place the diagonal part of the

seat belt between the breasts, above and

to the side of the pregnant abdomen.

Always wear a seat belt without slack or

twists.

JAG0176G

Occupant Protection

OCCUPANT SENSING

!WARNING:

•No objects whatsoever should be

attached to the centre cover of the

steering wheel, the passenger

fascia panel, the sides of the front

seats or the interior trim

immediately above the door

openings. Do not put anything on or

over the air bag inflation area.

Placing objects on or over the air

bag inflation area may cause those

objects to be propelled inside the

vehicle causing serious injury to the

occupants.

•Occupants with disabilities that

may require the vehicle to be

modified must contact a Jaguar

Dealer before any modifications are

made.

Note: (USA only) If you are considering

modifying your vehicle in any way to

accommodate a disability, for

example by altering or adapting the

driver’s or passenger’s seat(s) or air

bag system, please contact Jaguar

Cars at:

Jaguar Cars

Customer Relations Center

555 MacArthur Blvd

Mahwah

New Jersey 07430-2327

1-800-4JAGUAR OPTIONS 9.

•Several air bag system components

get hot after inflation. Do not touch

them after they have deployed.

•If an air bag has inflated, the air bag

will not function again and must be

renewed immediately. If a new air

bag is not fitted, the unrepaired

area will increase the risk of injury

in a collision.

In order to provide optimum protection

this vehicle is equipped with front and

side air bags. They are used in

conjunction with the seat belts to help

protect occupants from upper body

(thorax) and head injuries.

Occupant Protection

Air bag location

1. Driver’s air bag.

2. Front passenger air bag.

3. Combined head and thorax side air

bags are identified by labels.

System sensors

The air bags and seat belt pretensioners

are electrically controlled by an Advanced

Restraints Technology System (ARTS).

Various sensors determine the direction

and severity of an impact. The system

analyses this information then deploys

only the appropriate air bags e.g. the side

air bags where the impact is on that side

only.

are not designed to deploy at very low

speeds or in rear impacts.

Occupancy classification sensor

A weight sensitive sensor is located in the

front passenger seat to determine the

weight acting upon the seat. In certain

conditions, e.g. where no passenger is

present, the appropriate will be

deactivated. In a collision these would not

be deployed.

JAG0177L

JAG0512L

Occupant Protection

The occupancy weight sensor operates

as follows:

*It is possible to receive an intermittent

indicator illuminated with an empty seat

condition. This is part of the system’s

adaptive behaviour, and does not affect

the status of the passenger air bag.

However, if the indicator becomes

permanently illuminated when the seat is

definitely empty and the seat belt is

unbuckled, then contact your nearest

Jaguar Dealer immediately.

•If the seat is empty and the seat belt

unbuckled, the front passenger air

bag will not be activated and the air

bag indicator will not be illuminated.

•If the seat is occupied by, for

example, a small child or object with

the seat belt buckled, the front

passenger air bag will not be

activated and the air bag indicator will

be illuminated.

•If the seat is occupied by a larger child

or adult, the front passenger air bag

will be activated and the air bag

indicator will not be illuminated.

•** (Canada and USA only) Belt

tension sensor (BTS): If a child

restraint is fitted in the front

passenger seat using the seat belt’s

automatic locking device (see page

105), then the BTS supports the

decision function of the occupant

classification sensor and the front

passenger air bag is deactivated.

Note: The occupancy sensing system is

designed to confirm that a front

passenger is properly seated as

recommended:

•

Always sit centrally in the seat,

remaining in contact with the seat

back which for comfort should be

rearwards of the vertical position.

•

Adjust the seat to be as far back from

the facia as is practical.

•

Always wear seat belts.

The seat adjustment controls are

described on page 57.

Passenger

occupancy

status

Passenger

air bag

status

Indicator

active

Completely

empty

Deactivated No*

Low weight

occupant/

object

Deactivated Yes

Heavy

occupant/

object

Activated No

Child

restraint

fitted **

Deactivated Yes

Occupant Protection

Air bag deactivation indicator

The air bag indicator, on the centre

console is associated with the

deployment conditions for front seat

passenger air bags only.

Whenever the air bag indicator is

illuminated, the front passenger air bags

will not be deployed in the event of an

impact. Where the air bags are not

deployed, protection is provided by the

seat belts.

Note: The air bag indicator will illuminate

when the ignition system initially comes

on as part of the warning lamp check and

will extinguish after approximately six

seconds.

Overall system components

The overall occupant protection system,

Advanced Restraint Technology System

(ARTS) comprises the following

components:

1. Dual front crash sensors.

2. Passenger dual stage air bag.

3. Passenger buckle pretensioner.

4. Passenger seat occupancy sensor.

5. Passenger belt tension sensor.

6. Passenger side head and thorax air

bag.

7. Passenger side crash sensor.

8. Right-hand rollover protection bar

(convertible only).

9. Left-hand rollover protection bar

(convertible only).

10. Restraint control module.

11. Driver side crash sensor.

12. Driver side head and thorax air bag.

13. Driver buckle pretensioner.

14. Driver dual stage air bag (steering

wheel).

JAG0516N

JAG0538N

Occupant Protection

AIR BAG LABELS

An alert label on the front face of the

driver’s and passenger’s sun visor directs

you to read the warning label on the rear

face of each sun visor.

The warning label contains the following

statement:

!WARNING:

EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS

- Children can be killed or seriously

injured by the air bag.

- The back seat is the safest place for

children.

- Never put a rear-facing child seat in

the front.

- Always use seat belts and child

restraints.

- See Owners Manual for more

information about air bags.

DRIVER AIR BAG

!WARNING:

The air bag is a supplementary

restraint system that provides

additional protection in a severe

impact only - it does not replace the

need to wear seat belts. For maximum

safety protection in all crash situations,

a seat belt must be worn.

Note: Provided front seat occupants are

correctly seated, with seat belts worn, the

air bag will give additional protection to

the chest and facial areas in the event of

an accident.

Both front air bags use a dual inflation

technology which means, if activated, the

air bags will deploy as appropriate for the

severity of frontal impact.

Air bag deployment

!WARNING:

Activation of an air bag creates dust,

causing possible breathing difficulties

for asthma sufferers or other people

with respiratory problems. If an air bag

is activated, any occupant who suffers

from breathing difficulties should;

either leave the vehicle as quickly as

possible, or obtain fresh air by fully

opening the windows and doors.

Following inflation, some air bag

components are hot - do not touch

until they have cooled.

JAG0540N

Occupant Protection

100

Even with air bag equipment fitted,

seat belts must always be worn

because:

•An air bag will only provide

additional protection in certain

types of frontal collision. No

protection is afforded against the

effects of rear impacts, or minor

frontal impacts.

•Inflation and deflation takes place

instantaneously and will not

provide protection against the

effects of secondary impacts that

can occur during multiple vehicle

collisions.

•An inflating air bag can cause facial

abrasions and other injuries.

Minimise the risk of injury by

ensuring that front seat occupants

are wearing their seat belts and are

seated correctly, with the seat as

far back as is practical.

When an air bag inflates, a fine powder is

released. This is not an indication of a

malfunction. However, the powder may

cause irritation to the skin and should be

thoroughly flushed from the eyes and any

cuts or abrasions of the skin. After

inflation, front and side air bags deflate

immediately (head air bags deflate

slowly). This provides a gradual

cushioning effect for the occupants and

also ensures that the driver’s forward

vision is not obscured.

Front protection

With a front impact of sufficient force,

the restraints system will trigger the front

air bag(s) and seat belt pretensioners,

which immediately tighten the seat belts.

The seat belts then ease, allowing the

head and chest to contact the inflated air

bag.The air bag absorbs the remaining

energy of the impact and then deflates

rapidly via vent holes.

Front air bags are designed to inflate only

in frontal and near frontal collisions.

JAG0183L

101

Occupant Protection

SIDE AIR BAGS

!WARNING:

To ensure that the side air bags are

fully effective do not sit too close to, or

lean against the door trim. The side air

bag could injure you as it deploys from

the side of the seat.

The air bags, in combination with the seat

belts, can help reduce the risk of severe

injuries in the event of a significant side

impact collision.

When the seat mounted head and thorax

air bag inflates, it breaks through the seat

bolster stitching, giving protection to the

side of the rib cage and head of the driver

or front seat passenger.

The combined head and thorax side air

bags are designed to inflate only in a side

impact collision, unless the collision

causes sufficient lateral deceleration.

AIR BAG WARNING LAMP

The air bag warning indicator in

the driver’s instrument panel

will be lit for approximately six

seconds when the ignition is turned on.

If the indicator remains on, it indicates a

fault. Report the fault to a Jaguar Dealer

immediately. It is safe to drive the vehicle;

however, in an accident the air bags may

not operate.

Air bag warning lamp information is

shown on page 115.

AIR BAG SERVICE

INFORMATION

Air bag disposal

!WARNING:

Do not attempt to service, repair,

replace, modify or tamper with any part

of the air bag system or its electrical

fuses. Doing so could cause the

system to activate, resulting in

personal injury.

In the event of the vehicle being

dismantled, air bag module removal and

disposal must be carried out by a

qualified person.

JAG0185L

Occupant Protection

102

WHIPLASH PROTECTION

Both front seats are equipped with Active

Head Restraints (AHR) which reduce the

risk of neck and spinal injury (whiplash) in

the event of a rear impact.

When activated, the head restraint moves

upwards and forwards, supporting the

occupant’s head.

After activation, the whiplash protection

mechanism automatically resets and

does not require to be replaced.

ROLLOVER BARS

(Convertible only)

!WARNING:

•Do not place any objects on top of

the system trim covers behind the

rear passenger head restraints as

they could prevent correct

deployment of the system.

•Do not try to reset the system if it

deploys.

•Do not let anyone sit on the top

cover.

The Rollover Protection Device (RPD)

consists of two inverted U-shaped bars,

that are concealed underneath the rear

parcel shelf behind the rear passenger

seats, and sensors that monitor the

attitude of the vehicle.

If the sensors determine that a risk of

rollover is imminent, the rollover bars will

be deployed.

Note: When the rollover bars are

deployed they will deliberately break the

rear screen if the convertible top is closed.

If the Rollover Protection Device has been

deployed, proceed to your nearest Jaguar

Dealer to check for any damage and to

reset the system.

JAG0528L

JAG0189G

103

Child Safety

CHILD SEATS

General safety information

!WARNING:

•Extreme hazard! Do not use a

rearward facing child restraint on a

seat protected by an air bag in front

of it!

•Children must be restrained by a

child safety restraint that is suitable

for their weight and size.

•Children 12 years old and younger

can be killed or seriously injured by

the air bag. The rear seat is the

safest place for properly restrained

children.

•Do not install a rearward-facing

child seat in the front passenger

seat position since deployment of

the passenger facia air bag could

cause death or serious injury to the

child.

If, however, you have no alternative

but to place a child in the front

passenger seat, use only a

forward-facing child seat with the

passenger seat set fully rearward

and in its lowest position.

•Always follow the fitting

instructions supplied with the

appropriate child restraint system.

It is important to read and

understand all the information

contained in this handbook relating

to child safety before carrying a

child in your vehicle.

If you are unsure about any aspect

of this information, contact your

Jaguar Dealer.

In many countries legislation governs how

and where children should be carried

when travelling in a vehicle.

It is the responsibility of the driver to

comply with all regulations in force in the

country where the vehicle is being used.

Holding a baby or child in a person’s arms

is not a substitute for a child restraint

system.

In an accident, a baby or child held in this

manner can be crushed between the

vehicle’s interior and a restrained person.

The child can be injured by hitting the

interior or by being thrown from the

vehicle during a sudden manoeuvre or

impact.

JAG0190L

Child Safety

104

The seat belts fitted to your vehicle are

designed for adults and larger children.

For their safety, it is very important that all

infants and children under 12 years of age

are restrained in a suitable child safety

seat appropriate to their age and size..

Choosing a suitable child seat

!WARNING:

Choose a child seat that sits securely

on the seat cushion and against the

seat back.

Before you buy a child seat, it is important

to note that your child’s weight, rather

than age, determines the type of seat that

is required.

Jaguar strongly recommends the use

of LATCH seats, see page 106.

Babies and small children who cannot sit

up by themselves should be carried in an

approved rear facing infant carrier, which

should always be installed in a rear seat

position.

Jaguar recommends that a rear-facing

seat with a harness is used for as long

as your infant’s development allows.

Note: For approved child restraints, you

should contact your Jaguar Dealer.

Do not use a forward-facing seat until

your child is above the minimum weight of

9 kg (20 lbs) and able to sit up unaided.

Up to the age of two, a child’s spine and

neck are not sufficiently developed to

avoid injury in a frontal impact.

We strongly advise that you do not buy or

use a second-hand child seat. The seat

may have been used inappropriately, or

involved in an accident. In such

circumstances, the seat may not protect

your child.

Always check that the child seat can be

mounted securely in the required

position: if in doubt, you should speak to

your Jaguar Dealer.

Look for the following when selecting a

child restraint system:

•It should have a label certifying that it

meets the applicable Regulations.

•Carefully read the instructions

supplied with the restraint. Be sure

you understand them and can install

and use the device properly and

safely in the vehicle.

•Ensure that the child restraint system

is appropriate for the child’s weight

and development, refer to page 105..

Infant safety

Babies and small children who cannot sit

up by themselves should be carried in an

approved rear facing infant carrier, which

should always be installed in a rear

seating position.

105

Child Safety

CHILD SEATS

Fitting the child seat

Front and rear passenger seat belts have

an automatic locking device for use with

child seats.

When engaged, this device allows the belt

to be retracted (tightened) but not pulled

out. When used to secure a child seat,

therefore, the belt will automatically lock

at any point to which it has retracted.

1. Pull the seat belt all the way out to

engage the locking device.

2. Insert the metal tongue plate into the

buckle. A positive click indicates that

it is safely locked.

3. To fix the seat firmly, retract the belt

back to the reel, a ratchet operation

may be felt as the belt retracts.

Continue to feed the belt back onto

the reel until it fits snugly around the

child seat.

PROPER CHILD SAFETY SEAT USE CHART

Buckle Everyone. Children Age 12 and Under in Back.

INFANTS TODDLER YOUNG CHILDREN

WEIGHT Birth to 1 year at

least 20 to 22 lb (9 to

10 kg).

Over 1 year and Over

20 - 40 lb (9 to 18

kg).

Over 40 lb (18 kg)

Ages 4 - 8, unless 4ft

9ins (145 cm).

TYPE of SEAT Infant only or rear

facing, convertible.

Convertible /

Forward-facing.

Belt positioning

booster seat.

SEAT

POSITION

Rear-facing only. Forward-facing. Forward-facing.

ALWAYS

MAKE SURE

Children to 1 year

and at least 20 lb (9

kg) in rear-facing

seats.

Harness straps at or

below shoulder level.

Harness straps

should be at or

above shoulders.

Most seats require

top slot for

forward-facing.

Belt positioning

booster seats must

be used with both

lap and shoulder

belt.

Make sure the

lapbelt fits low and

tight across the

lap/upper thigh area

and the shoulder belt

fits snug crossing

the chest and

shoulder to avoid

abdominal injuries.

WARNING All children age 12

and under should

ride in the back seat.

All children age 12

and under should

ride in the back seat.

All children age 12

and under should

ride in the back seat.

Child Safety

106

4. Push down on the child seat to ensure

any slack is taken in by the

mechanism.

The above is a guide only. Depending on

the features of a particular child seat, e.g.

forward or rearward-facing, engage the

locking device before or after attaching

the belt, as convenient.

Unbuckling the belt and releasing the

child seat will allow the belt to resume its

normal operation.

General check list

Follow the check list each time your child

travels in the vehicle:

•Carefully follow the instructions

provided by the manufacturer of the

restraint system.

•Make sure your child falls into the

correct weight range for the seat.

•Always use the appropriate child

restraints and adjust harnesses for

every child, every trip.

•Avoid dressing your child in bulky

clothing and do not place any objects

between the child and the restraint

system.

•Regularly check the fit of your child

seat and replace seats or harnesses

that show signs of wear.

•No child seat is completely

child-proof. Encourage your child not

to play with the buckle or harness.

•Never leave a child unsupervised in

the vehicle.

•Ensure your child does not exit the

vehicle from the side where there is

traffic.

•Set your child a good example –

always wear your seat belt.

•Ensure that you have removed all

slack from the adult seat belt.

Child restraint top tether anchorages

and brackets

(Coupe only)

The top tether brackets are positioned on

the rear parcel shelf, under access

covers, at the centre-line of each rear

seating position.

Lift the top tether cover and connect the

top tether to the bracket on the rear shelf.

Adjust the length of the top tether strap to

hold the top of the child seat against the

vehicle seat back.

LATCH ANCHOR POINTS

(Lower Anchorages and Tethers for CHild

restraints)

JAG0192G

107

Child Safety

!WARNING:

Child restraint anchorages are

designed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child

restraints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used for adult seat belts or

for attaching other items or equipment

to the vehicle.

The rear seats of your vehicle are fitted

with LATCH brackets that allow the

LATCH child seat to be secured directly

and easily to the vehicle body without the

use of adult seat belts.

Many injuries to children in accidents are

caused by the incorrect fitting and

tensioning of the adult seat belts, which

are normally used to secure child seats.

The LATCH system reduces the likelihood

of incorrect fitting and is also quicker and

simpler to use.

LATCH child restraint system

Many LATCH child seats have two

retractable lower catches that lock onto

the anchorage loops, see page 108, and a

strap that clips onto the top tether

bracket, see page 106. The child seats

may have quick release mechanisms to

allow them to be removed easily.

The anchorage loops are accessible

through two trimmed apertures at the

back of the rear seat cushion. Their

location is highlighted by the small tag

labels with a child seat graphic. The

anchorage loops are located

approximately 60 mm (2.5 inches) below

each label, Pull back the side of the trim

as indicated, see illustration, to reveal the

aperture and the anchorage loops.

JAG0196G

Child Safety

108

Installing the LATCHISOfix seat

To ensure that the LATCHISOfix child

seat is installed safely, read all the

information provided in this Section.

!WARNING:

Always follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with the

LATCHISOfix child seat. The following

is to be considered only as a guide.

Fit the seat as follows:

1. Push the adult seat belt buckles into

their stowage recesses, to ensure

they do not interfere with the fitment

of the child seat.

2. Make sure there is nothing

obstructing the seat mounting

mechanism at the anchorage points.

3. Release the lever on the rear of the

seat and fully extend the two

attachment legs on the child seat.

Ensure the hook at the end of each leg

is open.

4. Position the attachment legs just in

front of the trimmed apertures for the

LATCHISOfix anchorage loops (see

illustration). Push the anchorage leg

through the trimmed aperture to

engage with the vehicle’s anchorage

loop. There should be an audible

click.

5. Repeat Step 4 for the seat’s second

anchorage leg.

6. Using firm and even pressure on both

sides, push the child seat rearwards

until it is secured firmly against the

seat back. Make sure you do not trap

the top tether strap behind the child

seat.

7. If your vehicle is fitted with top tether

anchorages brackets, make sure that

the top tether strap is secured to the

anchorage bracket, see page 106.

8. As a final check, firmly pull both sides

of the seat to confirm that it is

correctly locked in position.

Caution: Always follow the

manufacturer’s instructions supplied

with the LATCHISOFIX child seat.

Removing the LATCHISOfix seat

To remove the LATCHISOfix child seat,

press the locking button on each side of

the seat to release anchorage legs. If your

vehicle is fitted with top tether

anchorages, undo the top tether strap

and lift the child seat from the vehicle.

BOOSTER CUSHIONS

If a booster cushion is used, position the

lap section of the adult seat belt over the

child’s pelvis. The diagonal seat belt

should rest on the child’s shoulder, not

the neck.

JAG0197G

109

Facia and Controls

Chapter 5

CONTROL LOCATIONS

Auto

Inst Fuel

l/100km

JAG0511N

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1720

Facia and Controls

110

1. Steering wheel audio switches (64).

2. External light switches (71).

3. Jaguar sequential gear change down

paddle (159).

4. Speedometer (111).

5. Driver’s horn and air bag (63).

6. Message centre (111).

7. Tachometer (111).

8. Jaguar sequential gear change up

paddle (159).

9. Wiper and washer switch (65).

10. Cruise control or adaptive cruise

control switches (169).

11. Audio panel (184).

12. Hazard warning switch (76).

13. Touch-screen display (121).

14. Climate control panel (132).

15. Glove box compartment release

button (142).

16. Gear selector (157).

17. Automatic speed limiter switch (180).

18. Parkbrake switch (164).

19. Dynamic stability control mode switch

(166).

20. Engine START/STOP switch (50).

21. Ashtray and cigar lighter (140).

22. Steering column adjustment switch

(62).

23. Front fog lamp switch (75).

24. Dimmer switch (140).

25. Rear fog lamp switch 75).

26. Luggage compartment release switch

(43).

27. Forward alert switch (177).

28. Fuel filler flap release switch (52).

29. Hood release lever (234).

Page numbers (shown in brackets) refer

to pages in this handbook that have

further relevant information.

111

Instruments

Instrum ents

INSTRUMENT PANEL

OVERVIEW

None of the instruments will show correct

indications until the ignition system is in

the ON condition, see page 50.

1. Speedometer

Speed indication is in either:

USA - miles per hour, the outer figures,

and kilometres per hour on the inner ring.

Canada and Mexico - kilometres per

hour, the outer figures, and miles per hour

on the inner ring.

2. Message centre

For more detailed information on the

message centre, see page 118.

Message centre illumination

The message centre is lit at all times when

the ignition is ON, see page 50.

3. Tachometer)

Indicates engine speed in revolutions per

minute (x 1 000) and is calibrated in

increments of 250 rev/min.

Caution: Do not allow the needle to

enter the red sector.

4. Fuel gauge

The small arrow on the top of the fuel

pump symbol indicates which side of the

vehicle the fuel filler cap is located.

The message centre will display the

message FUEL LEVEL LOW when the

fuel level is approximately 1/16 tank

capacity, approximately a distance range

of 48 to 64 km (30 to 40 miles).

AVE FUEL

MPG

JAG0201N

1 2

Instruments

112

WARNING LAMPS AND

INDICATORS

1. Anti-lock braking system (ABS) - USA

only.

2. Anti-lock braking system (ABS) -

Canada only.

3. Adaptive cruise control (ACC).

4. Active front lighting system (AFL).

5. Engine malfunction.

6. Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS).

7. Air bag.

8. Right-hand direction indicator.

9. Front fog lights.

10. Rear fog light.

11. Dynamic stability control (DSC).

12. High beam.

13. Side lamps.

14. Seat belt.

15. Driver information center.

16. Automatic speed limiter (ASL).

17. Forward alert.

18. Parkbrake on/brake fluid low - USA

only.

19. Parkbrake on/brake fluid low -

Canada only.

20. Left-hand direction indicator.

RED warning lamps are for primary

warnings. A primary warning must be

investigated immediately by the driver or

a Jaguar Dealer.

AMBER warning lamps are for secondary

warnings. Some indicate that a vehicle

system is in operation, others indicate

that the driver must take action and then

report the fault to a Jaguar Dealer at the

earliest opportunity.

Other lamps within the instrument cluster

indicate system status, such as blue for

main beam and green for direction

indicators, when in operation.

AVE FUEL

MPG

JAG0003N

4 5 6

13 789

14161718 1112

1 2

19 10

113

Instruments

Lamp check

A lamp check is initiated when the ignition

system is in the ON condition and lasts for

three seconds (excepting the air bag

warning lamp which will remain ON for six

seconds). If any warning lamp remains

ON after this period, investigate the cause

before driving.

Some warning lamps have associated

messages displayed on the message

centre.

Note: Not all lamps are included in the

lamp check, for example main beam

headlights or direction indicators.

Brake (Red)

!WARNING:

If the message LOW BRAKE FLUID is

displayed, do not drive the vehicle until

the brake fault is rectified. Consult a

Jaguar Dealer immediately.

Illuminates when:

•the ignition system is ON and the

parkbrake is ON

•and, or the brake fluid is low

•and, or there is a fault with the

electronic brake system.

If the light is ON and there are no

associated messages it means that the

parkbrake is applied.

If the light flashes, there is a fault with the

parkbrake system and the parkbrake

cannot be applied.

If the indicator lamp is ON and the

message PARK BRAKE APPLIED is

displayed, it means that the parkbrake is

applied but the vehicle is moving. Release

the parkbrake or stop the vehicle when it

is safe to do so.

If the indicator lamp is ON and the

message BRAKE FLUID LOW with a RED

priority light is displayed on the message

centre, low brake fluid is indicated. In this

case, loss of braking in one or both brake

circuits may be imminent. Stop the

vehicle gently and seek qualified

assistance.

Seat belt (Red)

The warning light stays on for

60 seconds when the ignition is

ON and:

•The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.

•Or after a passenger is sitting in the

front seat and their seat belt is not

fastened.

The indicator lamp should go out when

the driver’s seat belt (and the front

passenger’s if the seat is occupied) is

fastened.

Beltminder

The beltminder feature, which

uses the same indicator as the

seat belt warning, provides

reminders to the driver that the driver’s

and/or front passenger’s seat belt is

unbuckled.

If the vehicle is moving at or above

16 km/h (10 mph) and the seat belt of an

occupied seat is not fastened, the

indicator lamp will flash.

Instruments

114

The flashing will last for ten seconds and

then repeat every 30 seconds for

approximately five minutes or until the

belt(s) is fastened or the vehicle stops.

If the warning indicator stays ON with the

seat belt(s) fastened, report the fault to a

Jaguar Dealer. It is safe to drive the

vehicle with the light ON, provided that

the seat belt(s) is properly fastened.

Ensure that all occupants seat belts are

fastened before driving.

Note: If a heavy object is placed on the

front passenger seat it may activate the

Beltminder feature. It is recommended

that the object be placed in the luggage

compartment.

Anti-lock braking system (ABS)

(Amber)

!WARNING:

If the ABS and brake warning

indicators are ON at the same time, do

not drive the vehicle until the fault is

rectified. Consult a Jaguar Dealer

immediately.

Illuminates if a fault has been

detected in the anti-lock brake

system (ABS) or the electric

parkbrake system. A warning message

will appear to indicate either ABS or

parkbrake fault.

The brake system will continue to function

normally, but without ABS braking.

If the indicator lamp comes on or stays on

after the bulb check cycle, the vehicle

should be driven to a Jaguar Dealer at the

earliest opportunity.

Active front lighting (Amber)

Illuminates when there is a

system fault. Report the fault to

a Jaguar Dealer as soon as

possible.

Engine malfunction (Amber)

Illuminates when the ignition

system is ON and remains on

until the engine is started.

If the indicator comes on when the engine

is running then there is an engine

malfunction.

Specialised diagnostic equipment is

required to repair such faults. Report the

fault to a Jaguar Dealer.

The vehicle may go to limp-home mode,

with the possibility of reduced engine

performance. Drive with caution.

Dynamic stability control (DSC)

(Amber)

The indicator will flash twice

every second when DSC is

operating.

The message DSC NOT AVAILABLE will

be displayed and the indicator lamp will

be ON continuously if a fault is detected.

When Trac DSC is selected the message

TRAC DSC is displayed for four seconds

and the warning indicator remains

illuminated.

DSC OFF (normally aspirated engines

only): If the system is turned OFF, a

message DSC OFF will be displayed at all

times and the warning indicator will

remain ON.

When the system is turned back ON the

warning indicator goes out and a

message DSC ON will be displayed for

four seconds.

115

Instruments

Rear fog lamp (Amber)

Illuminates when the rear fog

lamp is switched ON.

Adaptive cruise control (Amber)

Illuminates when adaptive

cruise control is active to

indicate that the vehicle is in

follow mode.

Forward alert (Amber)

Illuminates when Forward Alert

is active.

Air Bag (Amber)

Flashes if the air bag system or

the Roll Over Protection

System (Convertible only)

develops a fault. Then illuminates

permanently until the fault has been

diagnosed and cleared.

Report the fault to a Jaguar Dealer

immediately.

Tire pressure monitoring system

(Yellow)

Illuminates when one or more

tires are significantly under

inflated. The vehicle should be

stopped as soon as possible and the tires

checked and inflated to the

recommended pressure.

High beam (Blue)

Illuminates when the high beam

is switched ON or flashed ON.

Automatic speed limiter (Green)

Illuminates when automatic

speed limiter is active.

Front fog lamp (Green)

Illuminates when the front fog

lamps are switched ON.

Side lamps (Green)

Illuminates when the side

(parking) lamps are switched

ON.

Direction indicators (Green)

The appropriate indicator will

flash when the column stalk is

moved up or down to signal a

turn. If a direction indicator fails, the

audible ticking and lamp will sound and

flash at twice normal rate when that

indicator is selected.

Hazard warning lights

When the hazard warning switch is used,

both direction indicator tell-tales flash

simultaneously.

Instruments

116

AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND

INDICATORS

Various sounds are produced for warning and notification purposes as follows:

Hazard or Condition Chime or tone/remedy

External lights remain

ON when the driver’s

door is opened.

A chime will sound until the lights are switched OFF or

driver’s door is closed. The chime will not sound if the

lighting control is in AUTO position.

Hazard warning

indicators ON.

A ticking will sound until the hazard indicators are switched

OFF.

Direction indicators ON. A ticking will sound until the indicators are switched OFF.

Memory 1, 2 or 3

configuration saved.

A short tone as the memory selection is saved.

Air bag system failure. A tone sequence is repeated five times. Report the fault to

a Jaguar Dealer as soon as possible.

Seat belt reminder. A chime will sound until an unfastened seat belt is

fastened. The warning will cease if all the front seats are

occupied and the seat belts are buckled, the vehicle is

brought to a halt, the ignition is turned OFF or more than

approximately five minutes has elapsed with the vehicle in

motion, the ignition on and an occupied seat’s belt

unbuckled.

Electric parkbrake. If the parkbrake is applied whilst the vehicle is moving a

continuous chime is initiated; release the parkbrake. If

there is a fault with the system which would prevent the

application of the parkbrake, a brief sequence of chimes is

initiated.

Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) Driver intervene

and Forward Alert.

Multiple chime. Apply the brakes.

ACC low speed

automatic switch off.

A chime will sound to indicate that the ACC system is no

longer operating.

Speed is over 15 km/h

(9 mph) above the set

limit speed.

A short warning chime.Reduce speed.

Gear selector is not in

Park with ignition OFF.

A chime will sound. Select Park.

Convertible roof starting

to open or close.

High-pitched single chime.

117

Instruments

The Jaguar Smart Key

cannot be detected.

A chime will sound. The remote handset should be inserted

into the starter control unit, see page 37.

The Jaguar Smart Key

is to be removed from

the starter control unit.

A chime will sound for 60 seconds if the Jaguar Smart

Key is in the starter control unit and the driver’s door is

opened. The remote handset should be removed from the

starter control unit.

DSC OFF (Normally

aspirated engines only)

A chime will sound.

Information Displays

118

Information Displays

GENERAL INFORMATION

The driver information centre display

panel is situated within the instrument

cluster between the tachometer and

speedometer gauges.

The information centre is active as soon

as a door is opened for access.

The primary function of the message

centre is to inform the driver of the

following:

•warning messages

•temporary alert messages

•information messages.

The message centre screen is divided into

various zones displaying the following:

1. Gear selection, automatic or manual.

2. Speed control related information.

3. Priority warning indicators.

4. Warning messages, red or amber, if

system faults are detected. Status

messages are displayed to indicate

changes in state of certain vehicle

functions, e.g. navigation, telephone.

The clock can be shown when no

other information is required to be

displayed, see page 142.

5. Trip computer information, including

total distance covered by the vehicle,

see page 119.

6. Set trip computer information display

relating to A, B or Auto trip computer,

see page 119.

7. The fuel level gauge, which changes

colour from blue to red when the fuel

level drops to the reserve fuel level

indicator. The small arrow on the top

of the fuel pump symbol denotes

which side of the vehicle the fuel filler

cap is located.

INFORMATION MESSAGES

!WARNING:

If a red warning indicator is displayed,

stop the vehicle as soon as possible

when it is safe to do so.

Most messages, when displayed have an

associated warning light, red or amber,

which will come on to indicate the

message priority. Also from time to time

information messages will be displayed.

If more than one message is active, each

is displayed in turn for two seconds in

order of priority.

Messages take priority over the trip

computer data and will be displayed

when the ignition is in the convenience

mode, see page 42.

MILES

10849

A :

238.7

SETSPEED MPH

JAG0204N

119

Information Displays

Note: The message centre information

messages and their meanings are detailed

within the appropriate subject sections.

TRIP COMPUTER

The computer memory stores data for a

journey or series of journeys until it is

reset to zero.

The displayed information is for guidance

only, as it can be affected by traffic, road

and weather conditions.

Three independent memories are

available, A, B and Auto. A and B

memories can be set independently, while

the Auto trip will reset after every ignition

cycle as the vehicle moves.

Full trip computer information for the trip

memories can be displayed on the vehicle

touch-screen located in the centre

console, while current selected trip

computer information is displayed on the

instrument cluster message centre.

To access the trip computer touch-screen

settings:

•From the main Home touch-screen

menu, select Vehicle.

•Select Trip computer.

•Select requirements from the menu.

A system flow chart is given on page 128.

Trip computer message centre display

Vehicle total distance travelled 1, trip

distance 2 are displayed as well as,

average fuel economy and average speed

if selected via the touch-screen. Also A, B

or Auto will be displayed, depending on

the current memory selected.

Odometer

The odometer shows the total vehicle

distance travelled since the vehicle was

new.

The odometer and trip distance reading is

displayed in either miles or kilometres,

depending on the units selected via the

touch-screen, see page 128.

Changing the display

Press the TRIP button on the end of the

left column stalk switch repeatedly to

display the message centre data in the

following order:

•trip distance

•average speed

•average fuel consumption

•range.

Trip distance (A, B and Auto)

Distance travelled since the last memory

reset. The maximum trip reading is 16,090

kilometres (9,999.9 miles). The computer

will automatically reset to zero if this

distance is exceeded.

MILES

10849

A :

238.7

JAG0532N

JAG0049G

Information Displays

120

Average fuel consumption (A, B and

Auto)

The average fuel consumption, litres per

100 kilometres, miles per litre or miles per

gallon, based on the accumulated

distance travelled and the accumulated

fuel used.

Range

This shows the predicted distance, miles

or kilometres, that the vehicle should

travel on the remaining fuel, assuming

average fuel economy and fuel

consumption stay constant.

Average speed (A, B and Auto)

The average speed since the last press of

the reset button.

ML/km (also Miles/litre)

The distance display of imperial or metric

units is selected via the touch-screen, see

page 128.

Display language

The the display language is selected via

the touch-screen, see page 128.

Reset

The resetting of the trip memories is

carried out via the touch-screen, see

page 128.

121

Information Displays

TOUCH-SCREEN

Note: Information operation is given in the

Information Displays, page 118, which

incorporates the systems controlled via

the touch-screen.

Note: When the engine is stopped, for the

touch-screen to remain active, press the

engine START/STOP button again

without pressing the brake pedal (ignition

system ON).

1. Touch-screen: When initially

activated, the touch-screen will

display the main Home screen. From

this main Home screen all

touch-screen facilities and operations

are initiated by pressing the relevant

system touch-screen buttons and

icons.

2. Touch-screen ON/OFF: Press once

to turn the screen ON, press again to

revert to screen-saver mode. A further

press will turn the touch-screen OFF.

When the engine Start/Stop button is

pressed, the touch-screen is

activated by the ON/OFF switch on

the touch-screen console.

3. HOME screen button: Press to return

to the main HOME screen page from

all facilities.

System facilities

There are five major systems controlled

via the touch-screen with their individual

levels of operation and settings. They are

as follows:

•Audio: Radio display AM/FM, CD.

•Climate: Air conditioning,

Distribution, Seats, Heated steering

wheel, Automatic air recirculation.

•Phone: Digit dialler, Phone book, Last

ten calls (made, received, missed).

•Navigation: Destination, Stored

locations, Navigation setup, Route

options. Refer to navigation

handbook.

•Vehicle: Security, Parking, Valet

mode, Trip computer, Clock,

Brightness, Contrast, System

settings, Vehicle settings, Display

settings.

Home

Audio

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

12 : 26 pm

73 70

F F

.0 .5

Radio

90.7 FM1

KALX

Valet

JAG0007NAS

Information Displays

122

Touch-screen use

!WARNING:

In the interest of road safety, only

operate, adjust or view the system

when it is safe to do so.

Caution: Always run the engine during

prolonged use of the touch-screen.

Failure to do so may discharge the

vehicle battery, preventing the engine

from starting.

When the engine START/STOP button is

pressed, the touch-screen can be

activated by the ON/OFF switch on the

touch-screen console.

The buttons surrounding the

touch-screen display are referred to as

hard buttons and should be pressed

firmly. The touch-screen buttons are soft

buttons and only require a short, light

pressure to function. Do not use

excessive pressure.

When operating touch-screen buttons,

always extend the tip of one finger, and

withhold the thumb and remaining fingers

from the screen. Touching the screen with

more than one finger at a time may cause

false inputs.

Throughout the handbook, the expression

Select an item (or similar wording) means

touch the on-screen button to select or

alter the required item.

The handbook shows the on-screen

menus, explains how to operate the

controls and illustrates how to select or

alter settings and requirements. After

becoming familiar with the controls,

follow the on-screen menus and prompts,

to operate the system as required.

Where it is thought that guidance through

the touch-screen menus is necessary,

additional information has been given

within that section or subject.

Touch-screen display icons

Touch-screen display icons are as

follows, (they may not all be displayed at

the same time):

Return to the previous screen

displayed.

Warning triangle button

indicating a warning pop-up

message. Touch the pop-up to

cancel. The warning message will be

displayed on the message centre screen.

Telephone: send button.

Telephone: end call.

Page up or increase setting to

required value.

Page down or decrease setting

to required value.

Direct access to the valet mode

setting screen.

Telephone signal strength

indicator.

Telephone battery charge

indicator.

No phone connected.

Valet

123

Information Displays

Touch-screen care

Caution: Care must be taken to avoid

spilling or splashing drinks onto the

touch-screen.

Do not use any abrasive cleaners to clean

your touch-screen. For approved screen

cleaners, contact your Jaguar Dealer.

The touch-screen inner bezel must be

kept clean to maintain optimum

performance. Finger marks and attracted

dust should be regularly removed using a

soft cloth and Jaguar approved cleaning

agent.

Where possible, avoid exposing the

touch-screen to direct sunlight for long

periods.

PERSONALISED SETTINGS

General Information

The touch-screen provides touch-control

of the vehicle Audio, Climate, Phone,

Navigation and Vehicle systems, as fitted.

Note: When the vehicle engine is stopped

the touch-screen reverts to the stand-by

mode. To activate the touch-screen press

the engine Start/Stop button again.

Home screen display

When initially activated, the touch-screen

will display the main Home screen. The

Home screen may also be displayed at

any time by pressing the Home button on

the screen surround.

Screen settings: The touch-screen

brightness and contrast can be set to

individual requirements, including

dimming for night driving. This is

accessed via the Vehicle settings system.

Select Cont./Bright.

Select Day or Auto dimming

Day: Brightness and contrast can be

adjusted to personal requirements by

selecting the (+)or (-) buttons.

Home

Audio

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

71 70

F F

.5 .0

Valet

Radio

90.7 FM1

KALX

12 : 26 pm

JAG0206NAS

Vehicle

Off

Auto dimming

Trip computer

Clock adjust

Cont./Bright.

Syst. settings

Veh. settings

Brightness

Contrast

12 : 26 pm

JAG0207NAS

Vehicle

Off

Auto dimming

Trip computer

Clock adjust

Cont./Bright.

Syst. settings

Veh. settings

Brightness

Contrast

12 : 26 pm

JAG0208NAS

Information Displays

124

Auto: Select either On or Off. Brightness

and contrast are automatically adjusted

by the ambient light level. As the light level

decreases the touch-screen brightness

will decrease until the full night screen

level of brightness is initiated.

Further adjustment of the touch-screen

brightness can be achieved by using the

(+) or (-) buttons in the Cont./Bright

screen or by adjustment of the instrument

panel dimmer switch, see page 140.

Pop-up messages

The operation of certain functions will

cause a small message, pop-up, to

appear overlaying the touch-screen

display.

The pop-up is mainly for information and

will disappear automatically after a few

seconds, or can be dismissed by

touching the pop-up screen area.

If any action or adjustment is required the

message will clearly indicate what is

required and which button to touch.

Touch-screen systems

There are five major systems controlled

via the touch-screen with their individual

levels of operation and settings. They are

as follows:

•Audio

•Climate

•Phone

•Navigation

•Vehicle.

Audio system

The vehicle audio system interacts with

Navigation, In-car Telephone and Climate

Control systems.

The audio system, see page 184, can be

controlled from the switches on the

touch-screen console, the touch-screen

buttons and from the multi-function

controls on the left-hand side of the

steering wheel.

The system structure is shown as a flow

chart on page 127.

Automatic climate control

The automatic climate control system,

see page 132, can be controlled from the

touch-screen buttons.

Phone

The communications system is

composed of the following facilities:

•phone

•digit dialler

•phone book

•last ten calls made, received, missed.

The telephone system, see page 210, is

controlled from the touch-screen and the

multi-function controls on the left-hand

side of the steering wheel.

Navigation system

See the Navigation Handbook for detailed

information on the operation of the

navigation system.

Audio

Sound

Options

PTY

OnOff

Off

Audio

Cancel

AutoStore

Please wait..

Settings

12 : 26 pm

JAG0209NAS

125

Information Displays

Vehicle system

The following system functions are set

using the touch-screen:

•trip computer

•clock adjust

•contrast and brightness

•system settings

•vehicle settings.

The system structure is shown as a flow

chart on page 127.

Languages and distance units

The screen text and distance units are

available in various languages and either

Imperial or Metric units respectively.

The required languages and units are

accessed by selecting Vehicle on the

main system Home screen, then

selecting:

•Trip computer

•Units change

•Preferences and then selecting from

the menu.

To change the units: The unit choices

are selected by pressing the buttons

either - km, km/h l/100 or Mls. MPH

MPG.

Temperature display is selected by

pressing either °° °C or °°F.

Note: Celsius or Fahrenheit may be

selected independently of metric or

Imperial units.

To change the language: The language

choices are displayed as a list. Scroll up

or down through the list using the up or

down arrows.

Note: The navigation system is not

affected by the language change. To

change the navigation system language

display, refer to the Navigation Handbook.

Vehicle

Display set

Preferences

Button audio

Mls. MPH MPG

km km/h 1/100

Display language

English US

Vol. presets

Change

12 : 26 pm

JAG0210NAS

Vehicle

Display set

Preferences

Button audio

Mls. MPH MPG

km km/h 1/100

Display language

English UK

Vol. presets

Change

Vehicle

Dutch

Danish

Finnish

French

Norwegian

12 : 26 pm

JAG0211NAS

Information Displays

126

Timeout to home screen

The Timeout to home screen (return to

display the Home screen) can be

adjusted.

From the main Home screen select the

Vehicle button.

1 Select the Syst. settings button.

Select Display set 2 followed by Timeout

to home screen either On or Off 3. Using

the slider bar the time out can be adjusted

from 10 seconds to five minutes.

Note: An initial default setting of one

minute is set if no time adjustment is

made.

Vehicle

Trip B

Auto

Reset

Unit Ch

Distance

Av. speed

Av. fuel

500 miles

35 MPH

23 MPG

300 miles

Range

Clock adjust

Cont./Bright.

Trip computer

Syst. settings

Veh. settings

Trip A

12 : 26 pm

JAG0231NAS

Vehicle

Display set.

Preferences

Button audio

Vol. presets

12 : 26 PM

50 seconds

Screensaver set.

Timeout to home

screen

Off

JAG0544NAS

127

Information Displays

Menu structure

The following menu outlines represent the touch-screen Audio, Vehicle and

Telephone system structure.

Audio

AM/FM

CD Settings

Sound

Base

Treb le

Balance

Fade

Options

REG (Regionalisation)

EON (Extended Other Networks)

FM text

PTY (Choose from itemised list)

AM/FM

Settings

Sound

Base

Treb le

Balance

Fade

Options

CD text

Information Displays

128

Vehicle

Trip computer

Clock adjust Trip A

Cont./Bright Distance

Syst. settings Av speed

Veh. settings Av fuel

Range

Reset

Trip B

Distance

Av speed

Av fuel

Range

Reset

Auto

Distance

Av speed

Av fuel

Range

Add/Delete trip

Units

Display set

Screen saver

Time out to home screen

Preferences

Units (Change from Metric to Imperial)

Display language

Button audio

Audible

Vol. presets

Facilities volume set

AVC (Automatic volume control)

129

Information Displays

Trip computer

Clock adjust

Cont./Bright Adjust time

Syst. settings Clock display

Veh. settings 12/24 hour

Set

Trip computer

Clock adjust

Cont./Bright

Syst. settings Day

Veh. settings Auto

Brightness

Contrast

Trip computer

Clock adjust

Cont./Bright

Syst. settings

Veh. settings Display set

Screen saver

Time out to home screen

Preferences

Units (Change from Metric to Imperial)

Display language

Button audio

Audible (On/Off)

Vol. presets

Facilities volume set

AVC (Automatic volume control)

Information Displays

130

Trip c ompu ter

Clock adjust

Cont./Bright

Syst. settings

Veh. settings

Security

2 stage unlock

Drive away locking

Parking

Reverse mirror dip

Valet mode

(Enter a PIN security number)

Phone

DigiDial Make a call

Names Name search

Last 10

Made

Received

Missed

Settings

Undock

Change phone

Search new

131

Information Displays

Voicemail Enter voicemail No.

Answer options

Auto answer

Caller announce

Phone options

Ringtones

Phone ringtone

Jaguar ringtone

Phonebook

Auto download

Erase entire book

Refresh book

Climate Control

132

Climate Control

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

!WARNING:

Do not disconnect any pipes in the air

conditioning refrigeration system. A

refrigerant is used which can cause

blindness if allowed to contact the

eyes. If refrigerant should contact the

eyes or skin, wash the eyes or affected

area with cold water for several

minutes. Do not rub. As soon as

possible thereafter, obtain treatment

from a doctor or eye specialist.

The climate control panel is located in the

centre console. There are two control

facilities:

•A dedicated control panel located

below the audio and CD panel for

operation of basic features.

•A touch control and display unit for

additional functions and personal

settings.

The climate control system features

automatic temperature and air

distribution control, which is programmed

to maintain optimum levels of comfort

within the vehicle in all but the most

severe conditions.

While the controls can be adjusted

manually to satisfy individual

requirements, allowing the system to

function automatically (in AUTO mode) is

by the simplest method of operation and

is preferable in most operating

conditions.

In Auto mode air recirculation

sensor detects pollutants and

selects air recirculation when

the level of pollution outside the vehicle

reaches a certain level. The sensor

response level can be adjusted on the

touch-screen.

Once the level of pollutants decreases, air

recirculation will switch off.

To set the automatic air recirculation

sensitivity level of the pollution sensor:

•From the Climate Control home

screen select Settings.

•Adjust the automatic air recirculation

sensitivity setting as required by

selecting the (+) or (-) buttons.

Use of air conditioning

Note: To prevent humidity build up inside

the vehicle and possible screen misting,

avoid driving with the air conditioning

system off or in manual air recirculation for

prolonged periods.

Air conditioning is an integral part of the

climate control system, providing cooled

and dehumidified air for occupant

comfort. The dry airflow is also effective in

preventing misting of the windows.

While the air conditioner can be manually

switched off, it is recommended that it is

used in all climatic conditions throughout

the year, preferably in AUTO mode.

133

Climate Control

Close all windows and the convertible top

when the air conditioning is on to ensure

satisfactory operation.

•If the air conditioning system is not

used frequently, it should be run

briefly at least once each week, with a

cold setting. This will prevent the

seals from drying out with subsequent

refrigerant leaks.

•Surplus water produced by the

dehumidifying process is expelled

from the system via drain tubes

beneath the vehicle. This may result in

a small pool of water forming on the

road when the vehicle is stationary

and is not a cause for concern.

Climate Control

134

AIR VENTS

The air vents provide fresh or heated air to

the interior of the vehicle. Ensure that the

air intake grille at the base of the

windshield is kept clear of any

obstruction.

Air flow and direction can be adjusted

with the thumbwheel controls 1 and

direction vanes 2.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE

CONTROL

Automatic climate control provides

efficient regulation of the vehicle

environment without constant

adjustments from the occupant.

Sensors inside the vehicle monitor

temperature, humidity 3 and direct

sunlight 4. Do not obstruct these

openings. In response to sensor

indications, the electronic control system

automatically adjusts the heat input,

blower speed, air intake and airflow

distribution to maintain the selected

temperature(s) and reduce misting.

Automatic operation provides optimum

comfort under most driving conditions.

It is recommended that automatic

control, AUTO, is selected as the

normal operating mode.

Automatic control, AUTO, can be

overridden at any time.

JAG0508N

2 2 13 1

135

Climate Control

Centre console control panel

1. Rear screen heat.

2. Temperature decrease, left-hand

zone.

3. Temperature increase, left-hand zone.

4. Air recirculation and fresh air.

5. AUTO climate control knob.

6. Blower speed rotary control.

7. Temperature decrease, right-hand

zone.

8. Temperature increase, right-hand

zone.

9. Windshield defrost and demist.

10. Climate control main touch-screen.

Panel illumination

The illumination level is adjusted by the

common instrument panel dimmer

control, refer to page 140.

To switch the climate control on

With the ignition system ON, press the

AUTO rotary control knob in the centre of

the centre console control panel. The

system will switch on in the auto

operating mode. The control knob LED

indicator will be illuminated.

Note: It is advisable to allow the system to

stabilise before making large changes to

the temperature setting, particularly at the

start of a journey, refer to Temperature

selection.

To switch the climate control off

The system can be turned OFF only from

the options on the Climate touch-screen,

see page 137.

Settings

Temp. sync.

External

12 : 26 PM

Auto

Left Right

71 70

F .0 F

Auto

Econ

Climate

Auto

Climate

JAG0496NAS

Climate Control

136

AUTO mode

Automatic operation provides a

controlled environment over a

temperature range of 16°C to 28°C

(59°F to 83°F)17°C to 31°C (61°F to 89°F)

and should be regarded as the normal

operating mode.

To select automatic climate control press

the AUTO button, the LED illuminates to

confirm selection.

Select the required temperature.

Front and rear screen heating and timed

air recirculation may be selected in AUTO

mode. Selecting any other control will

cancel AUTO operation. The control knob

LED indicator will be extinguished.

Temperature selection

Separate controls allow the driver and

passenger zone temperatures to be

independently adjusted. Press the red

buttons to increase temperature and the

blue buttons to decrease temperature.

Both driver and passenger temperatures

are displayed on the touch-screen.

Pressing the driver’s buttons to select the

maximum or minimum temperature

settings causes the display to change to

HI or LO respectively and cancel AUTO

mode.

To quickly jump from HI or LO to a

convenient mid range temperature

of 22°C (72°F)22°C (72°F), press and hold

AUTO for a few seconds.

Air recirculation

Caution: Prolonged operation with

recirculation selected and setting the

automatic air recirculation sensor to a

needlessly high level in cold and damp

conditions, could result in interior

screen misting.

Press the recirculation button to select air

recirculation. Selection is indicated by the

screen symbol and the button LED

illuminating.

To deselect air recirculation, press the

recirculation button again, or select

AUTO.

Note: When air recirculation is selected,

the sound of the airflow will change, this is

normal.

Windshield defrost and demist

To remove frost or heavy misting from the

windshield, press the DEF button.

•The blower switches on automatically

at a high level speed but the speed

can be adjusted manually if required.

•Air conditioning switches on

automatically (to dehumidify the air)

and cannot be deselected.

•Recirculation is cancelled and cannot

be selected.

•The front screen heater and the rear

screen heater and door mirror heaters

switch on automatically, provided the

engine is running.

137

Climate Control

•The button LED illuminates.

To deselect defrost mode, press AUTO or

press the DEF button again.

Rear heated screen

The screen heater may be switched on

and off in any mode, including system off,

but only operates when the engine is

running.

The rear screen and door mirror heaters

switch off automatically after 21 minutes.

The screen heater may be manually

deselected during the timed period using

the push buttons.

In cold ambient conditions, at the start of

a journey, the rear screen heater will

switch on automatically for the timed

period, it will come on below-1°C (30°F).

Air conditioning

Press the AUTO rotary control knob to

turn the air conditioning on.

The air conditioning system is controlled

automatically in AUTO mode to maintain

the desired temperature and humidity

(even if higher temperature settings are

selected).

The air conditioning system is also

switched on automatically in defrost

mode (DEF) in order to dehumidify the air.

Blower speed

Set the blower speed as required by

adjusting the AUTO rotary control knob.

When operating in AUTO mode, blower

speed is controlled automatically and

AUTO is displayed on the touch-screen.

Any adjustment of the knob will cancel

AUTO mode.

Note: In AUTO mode, the blower only

operates at low speed, if heating is

required, until the engine is warm.

Heated seats and steering wheel

The heated seats and steering wheel can

be controlled only from the climate screen

options on the touch-screen. See pages

61 and 63 respectively.

Touch-screen operation

The climate control touch-screen is

controlled via the Home touch-screen.

Press the Climate button on the Home

touch-screen.

Home

Audio

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

71 70

F F

.5 .0

Valet

Radio

90.7 FM1

KALX

12 : 26 pm

JAG0011NAS

Climate Control

138

The climate control main view is

displayed, from which the climate control

settings can be set.

Climate control display icons

The climate control display buttons and

icons are as follows:

Auto climate control ON.

Distribution to windshield.

Distribution to face.

Distribution to feet.

Synchronizes the driver and passenger

climate control zones.

Blower speed control decrease and

increase.

Access to the Settings control

touch-screen to adjust personal climate

zone settings, also access to the

automatic air recirculation sensor control

setting.

Econ ON/OFF. Economy mode turns off

the air conditioning compressor and

reduces power consumed by the climate

control system which will reduce air

conditioning performance. Econ mode

can be turned OFF only from the climate

screen options on the touch-screen.

Prolonged use may cause the windows to

mist.

Climate ON/OFF button.

External temperature

The external temperature is displayed at

the top of the climate touch-screen zone.

Settings

Temp. sync.

External

Auto

Left Right

71 70

F .0 F

Auto

Econ

Climate

Auto

Climate

12 : 26 pm

JAG0216NAS

Auto

Temp. sync.

Settings

Econ

Climate

147

Convertible Top

OPENING THE CONVERTIBLE

TOP

!WARNING:

•Before opening or closing the

convertible top, ensure that all

occupants have moved their hands,

fingers, hair, etc. clear of moving

parts.

•Do not place items on the tonneau

panel or over the Rollover

Protection Device covers.

The power operated convertible top and

rear quarter windows, see page 88, are

controlled by the switch located on the

overhead console. The ignition system

must be ON, see page 50. The top will

latch and unlatch automatically. The top

can be operated at speeds below

24 km/h (15 mph), however, for safety it

should not be opened or closed when the

vehicle is being driven.

Caution:

•The convertible top, will not

operate unless the luggage

separator is correctly located in the

deployed position in the luggage

compartment, see page 150 and

that the luggage compartment lid is

firmly closed.

•Check that there is nothing in the

rear area which could interfere with

the top when folding down, e.g.

ensure that the battery cover trim is

fitted and secure.

•Do not attempt to operate the

convertible top at temperatures

below –15°C (5°F). This may cause

damage to the fabric.

•If the convertible top is operated

above 24km/h (15 mph) to

excessive speeds there is a risk of

damage to the convertible top.

•Do not attempt to OPEN the

convertible top manually, as

damage to the linkage mechanism

may occur.

1. Ensure that the ignition system is in

the ON condition.

2. Ensure that the luggage separator in

the luggage compartment is in the

fully deployed position. If it is not

positioned correctly the proximity

switches will not operate and the

convertible top will not open, see

page 151.

JAG0486N

Convertible Top

148

Press and hold the rear of the

overhead console switch. (Do not

release the switch until the top is fully

open.).

The rear quarter windows open,

an audible warning sounds, and the

top unlatches and starts to move, the

tonneau closing panel opens. (The

front windows will fully open. The door

window switch will require to be

pressed to close the window.).

When the top is fully open, the audible

warning sounds again. The tonneau

closing panel is fully automated and

encloses the convertible top in the

stowed position.

6. Release the overhead console switch.

Note: If at any period during the

convertible top opening sequence the

switch is released, all movement of the

convertible top will cease.

Caution: Do not at any time during the

opening or closing of the convertible

top press the engine START/STOP

button as all movement will cease and

the convertible top will have to be

manually re-set.

Convertible top manual re-set

!WARNING:

It is advisable that two persons carry

out this procedure so that the

convertible top and tonneau cover are

fully supported when required;

although it is possible that this

procedure may be carried out by one

person with care.

To manually re-set the convertible top:

Ensure that the engine is not running and

that the ignition system is OFF.

JAG00487N

JAG0240G

JAG0241G

JAG0246G

149

Convertible Top

Grasp the sides of the section, as shown,

and pulling sharply. Remove the Allen key

from its stowed position.

From inside the luggage compartment,

remove the vent screen to access the

operating pump.

Insert the Allen key into the pump and

rotate counter clockwise (approximately

one turn).

The convertible top and tonneau cover

movement can cease in any of the

positions 1, 2 or 3, as shown.

If the movement ceases in position 1,

release the tension in the convertible top

cover and tension bow (rear of convertible

top) by lifting the front of the convertible

top and pulling rearwards A.

Lift the tension bow upwards B, and

forwards to clear the tonneau cover).

JAG0247G

JAG0248G

JAG0420G

JAG0421G

Convertible Top

150

Lift the tonneau cover fully and support C.

Pull the convertible top rearwards and

downwards D so that it is fully stowed.

Rest the tonneau cover in the closed

position E.

If the movement ceases in either positions

2 or 3, lift the tonneau cover fully upright

and support C, pull the front of the

convertible top rearwards and

downwards so that it is fully stowed D.

Rest the tonneau cover in the closed

position E.

All positions: Turn the Allen key

clockwise approximately one turn and

return it to its stowed position, refit the

rear seat centre section, luggage

compartment vent screen and close the

luggage compartment lid.

Switch ON the ignition system and start

the engine. Press and hold the front of the

convertible top switch until the

convertible top is closed and fully latched.

If the convertible top requires to be open,

press and hold the rear of the switch.

Preparation for Winter

Before the onset of Winter, it is advisable

to coat the convertible top seals and

respective body seals with a compound,

such as Carbaflo KSP 105, to aid

operation in freezing conditions.

This action will need to be repeated at the

start of each Winter to maintain

protection.

Care must be taken so that the compound

does not come into contact with the

convertible top material. For further

advise you should contact your Jaguar

Dealer.

Luggage separator

Caution: Luggage items should not be

placed forward or on top of the luggage

separator as it could cause damage to

the separator.

A luggage separator is located in the

luggage compartment to prevent items

from moving into the area where the

convertible top is to be stowed.

When the convertible top is closed, the

normal position for the luggage separator

is in the retracted position with the

partition positioned vertically.

JAG0422G

JAG0242G

151

Convertible Top

To deploy the luggage separator

Caution: Do not place large objects

underneath the luggage separator

partition when deployed as damage to

the convertible top may occur.

Pull the handle on the luggage separator

towards you. There is a lug on either side

of the luggage separator: slide the lugs

into the sliders on either side of the

luggage compartment. The luggage

separator will positively locate in the

vertical position. A proximity switch, 1, is

located in the separator assembly so that

the convertible top will not open and

retract until the separator is in the fully

deployed position.

When selected, if the convertible top does

not open, the positioning of the luggage

separator should be checked and ensure

that the luggage compartment lid is firmly

closed.

To remove the luggage separator

With the luggage separator in the

normally stowed position, pull the handle

towards you, 1 and disengage the lugs

from the sliders 2.

Holding the centre of the main body of the

luggage separator, rotate upwards 3,

disengaging the main body of the luggage

separator from the support brackets.

Remove the luggage separator and

retract the withdrawn partition section of

the luggage separator into the main body.

JAG0243G

JAG0244G

Convertible Top

152

To install the luggage separator

With the partition slightly extracted,

position the luggage separator up to the

support brackets with the front edge

raised. Ensuring, that for both sides, the

catch 1 will engage in the locating slot 2.

Rotate the main body of the luggage

separator 3 so that it sits down into the

support brackets. Fit the partition lugs

into the sliders 4 and retract the luggage

separator partition into the normal

stowage position.

CLOSING THE CONVERTIBLE

TOP

1. Ensure that the ignition system is in

the ON condition.

2. Press and hold the front of the

overhead console switch, see page

147. (Do not release the switch until

the convertible top is fully closed and

latched, and if required the rear

quarter windows and front door

windows are fully closed.).

3. If the front windows are in any other

position than fully down, they will

retract to the fully down position on

pressing the closure switch. As the

convertible top starts to move the

audible warning will sound.

4. When the top is fully closed and

latched, the audible warning sounds

again and the rear quarter windows

will close followed by the front door

windows returning to the fully closed

position.

Note: If at any period during the

convertible top closure sequence the

switch is released, all movement of the

convertible top will cease.

JAG0245G

153

Convertible Top

Manual closure of the convertible top

If necessary, the convertible top can be

closed manually, as follows:

Grasp the sides of the section, as shown,

and pull sharply. Remove the Allen key

from its stowed position.

From inside the luggage compartment,

remove the vent screen to access the

operating pump.

Insert the Allen key into the pump and

rotate counter clockwise (approximately

one turn).

Pull the tonneau release cable, until fully

extended. Close the luggage

compartment lid.

Fully open the tonneau panel. It will

self-support when fully opened.

JAG0246G

JAG0247G

JAG0248G

JAG0249G

JAG0250G

Convertible Top

154

From the left-hand side of the vehicle,

place your right hand down the side of the

folded convertible top. Ensure that the

bottom of the convertible top, which

includes the tension bow, is securely

held. Securely hold the convertible top

header assembly with your left hand. With

both hands pull the whole of the

convertible top up and forward.

Ensure that the tension bow is fully raised.

Supporting the tension bow, lower the

tonneau panel 1. Then lower the tension

bow 2 onto the tonneau panel.

Remove the plug from the convertible top

header trim.

JAG0251G

JAG0252G

JAG0253G

JAG0254G

155

Convertible Top

Support the front header. Insert the Allen

key into the header panel key slot and turn

clockwise until the top is securely latched

and resistance is felt.

Return the Allen key to its stowed

position, refit the rear seat centre section,

luggage compartment vent screen and

the plug into the convertible top header

trim.

Message centre information displays

JAG0255G

Message Warning

Light

Priority

Indicator

Meaning

HOOD NOT LATCHED None Red The convertible roof is not

latched, check for security.

HOOD OUT

OF POSITION

None Amber The convertible roof is not

correctly positioned. Open or

close the convertible roof again

and check for correct

positioning.

LUGGAGE COVER OUT

OF POSITION

None Amber The luggage separator is out of

position and should be checked,

see page 152.

Load Carrying

156

Load Carrying

GENERAL INFORMATION

!WARNING:

•(Coupe only): Extreme care must be

taken when closing the luggage

compartment lid when passengers

are travelling in the rear seats.

•Locate heavy loads in the luggage

compartment towards the front of

the vehicle and secure them to stop

them sliding. Loose items can be a

hazard.

•Do not drive with the luggage

compartment open as exhaust

fumes can be drawn into the

passenger compartment.

To prevent permanent damage to the

luggage compartment trim, it is advisable

to distribute luggage weight evenly over

the entire luggage floor area.

LUGGAGE COVER

(Coupe only)

Caution: It is advisable that items are

not placed on the luggage cover.

The luggage cover is removed by

releasing the two latches 1 on either side

of the luggage cover and sliding it

downwards and forwards so that the rear

locating pegs 2 are disengaged from the

trim and body. This will allow the luggage

cover to be completely removed.

To refit the luggage cover first locate the

rear pegs 2. Then from the side of the

vehicle, support the luggage cover and fit

the front catch1, by pressing it firmly

through the cover and closing the catch,

this will hold the luggage cover in place.

Repeat this procedure on the other side of

the vehicle.

JAG0256G

157

Transmission

Chapter 6

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The transmission system is designed to

operate in two distinct modes,

conventional automatic and Jaguar

Sequential Shift.

The automatic modes are accessed by

the gear selector:

•D - Drive - automatic shifting.

•S - Sport - sport automatic shifting.

The Jaguar Sequential Shift mode

enables sequential manual gear selection

in D (temporary) and S (permanent)

modes via the steering wheel mounted

paddles.

Note: In addition to the standard shift

patterns available in D and S, the

transmission will adapt to differing driving

conditions by modifying shift points based

upon vehicle sensor information for road

gradient, cornering, braking pressure and

driving style.

Gearshift interlock

!WARNING:

The brake pedal must be applied

before selecting forward or reverse

drive from a stationary position.

A brake pedal and gearshift interlock

system is incorporated in the automatic

gear selector mechanism.

To move the gear selector from Park:

1. Ensure the ignition system is in the

convenience mode or start the

engine.

2. Press the brake pedal.

Gear selection and message centre

indication

The message centre indicates the

position of the gear selector at the top of

the message centre screen. When

automatic selection is made the screen

indicates either P, R, N or D, 1. When S is

selected the indication changes to DS, 2

and if manual selection is made the

indication is from 1 to 6, 3.

P = Park – Use when parked. In this

position the transmission is locked. Do

not select if the vehicle is moving.

R = Reverse – Do not select if the vehicle

is moving forward.

JAG0257G

Transmission

158

N = Neutral – Disconnects drive to the

wheels. Use the parkbrake when stopping

temporarily.

D = Drive – All six forward gears are

changed automatically.

S = Sport – All six forward gears are

changed automatically with modified gear

shift points.

Stationary vehicle

When the vehicle is stationary the gear

selector may be left in D, or S, unless the

vehicle is to be parked. When stopping for

extended periods, either select P or apply

the parkbrake and select N.

Shift inhibit

Reverse is inhibited when the vehicle is

moving forward.

Note: Reverse inhibit will not function in

limp-home mode.

Note:

•

The engine is limited to a maximum

speed of 4 500 rev/min. when N or P

is selected.

•

After selecting forward or reverse

drive ranges from N or P, wait briefly

for the transmission to engage before

accelerating.

Automatic operating modes

There are two available automatic modes:

D - Drive: All six gears are changed

automatically. The shift points are

determined by accelerator pedal position

and road speed to provide the best

balance of performance, refinement and

fuel economy for the large majority of

driving conditions.

S - Sport: The transmission operates

automatically, but the gearshift points are

modified to maximise the vehicle

response in demanding driving

conditions. This mode is not suitable for

town or highway cruising.

The automatic modes also offer additional

features:

Kick-down: Is operated when the

accelerator pedal is fully depressed

beyond the normal operating spring

pressure to provide maximum engine

performance. Kick-down is used in

circumstances where rapid acceleration

is required, such as when overtaking.

Kick-down causes the transmission to

change down to the lowest gear possible

to achieve maximum acceleration. The

gear engaged depends on the road speed

at the time of kickdown.

Driver type recognition: The

transmission monitors driving style and in

combination with sensors in the vehicle,

varies the shift schedule, fast-off, corner

recognition and shift adapt under braking

functions proportionally with driving style.

Note: This feature is only active in S -

Sport mode.

Fast-off: Activated when rapidly lifting-off

the accelerator pedal and takes account

of road gradient. This feature inhibits

up-shifts enhancing performance.

Note: This feature will vary its activation,

dependant upon the driver type if S -

Sport is selected.

159

Transmission

Shift adapt under braking: Under

braking, the transmission will vary the

down-shift point in proportion to braking

effort and road gradient. This feature is

realised in conjunction with positive

torque, resulting in a smoother

down-shift.

Note: This feature will vary its activation,

dependant upon the driver type if S -

Sport is selected.

Positive torque: Provides throttle blips

on down-shifts under braking, improving

shift feel.

Note: This feature is only active in S -

Sport mode.

Corner recognition: Inhibits up-shifts

during cornering to provide improved

vehicle balance.

Note: This feature will vary its activation,

dependant upon the driver type if S -

Sport is selected.

Road gradient adaption: When the

vehicle is being driven on roads with uphill

gradients, the transmission adapts the

shift pattern to make better use of engine

power.

When driving on roads with long downhill

gradients, the transmission may

automatically select a lower gear to

increase engine braking. Selecting S will

increase the tendency of the transmission

to select a lower gear in these conditions,

further increasing engine braking.

Note: It is also possible to manually select

a lower gear to increase engine braking via

use of the shift paddles.

Cruise control: When cruise control is

active, the transmission selects a shift

pattern to suit cruise control operation,

see page 169.

Dynamic stability control (DSC): When

DSC is switched ON and the system is

activated, the transmission selects a shift

pattern to suit traction control conditions.

Manual operating modes - Jaguar

Sequential Shift

Shifts in the Jaguar Sequential Shift

manual mode are optimised to provide a

rapid response to gear shift requests.

Up-shift requests are optimised for

performance via the short shift function,

this will result in a firmer shift feel than in

automatic modes. Down-shift requests

realise a throttle blip during the shift event

resulting in improved shift feel.

The Jaguar Sequential Shift modes can

be accessed either temporarily or

permanently.

Temporary manual gear selection:

When the gear selector is in the D

position, manual mode may be directly

accessed by the single action of

operating the steering wheel mounted

shift paddles.

This convenience feature allows

immediate but temporary use of the shift

paddles whilst the gear selector is in D.

If continued use of manual mode is

required, the gear selector may be

subsequently moved to the S position to

enter permanent manual mode in the

currently selected gear.

If the gear selector remains in the D

position, temporary manual mode will be

held whilst the driver is accelerating,

decelerating, cornering or continuing to

request shifts via the paddles.

Transmission

160

The transmission will revert to automatic

operation after a short period of driving at

steady speed; alternatively the shift-up (+)

paddle may be held for a short period

(approximately one second) to return

directly to automatic operation in D.

Permanent manual gear selection:

Select the S position, permanent manual

mode then is accessed by the operation

of the steering wheel mounted shift

paddles.

The message centre will highlight the

currently selected gear.

To exit from the Jaguar Sequential Shift

permanent manual mode, move the gear

selector to the D position. The

transmission will revert to the D automatic

shift mode.

Manual operation

To shift-up, briefly pull the shift-up (+)

paddle on the right-hand side of the

steering wheel towards you.

To shift-down, briefly pull the shift-down

paddle (-) on the left-hand side of the

steering wheel towards you.

The message centre display will change

to highlight the requested gear.

Note: The transmission will inhibit

up-shifts and down-shifts if the requested

shift would result in an engine speed

outside the normal operating range of the

engine. If this occurs, the message centre

will briefly display the requested gear

selection, but will return to displaying the

current gear.

JAG0258G

JAG0048G

161

Transmission

The Jaguar Sequential Shift mode also

has the following features:

Kick-down: Operation of kick-down in

Jaguar Sequential Shift mode will

over-ride the currently selected gear. The

lowest available gear will be selected for

maximum acceleration and will be

highlighted in the message centre display.

Subsequent manual shifts may then be

selected as usual.

Positive torque: Provides throttle blips

on down-shifts, improving shift feel and

response.

Shift assist: The transmission will

automatically up-shift at the engine speed

redline in Jaguar Sequential Shift mode

as if commanded manually.

The transmission will automatically

down-shift when the engine rpm drops

too low for the currently selected gear.

When the vehicle approaches, or comes

to rest, second gear is automatically

selected.

Subsequent pullaways will occur in

second gear, unless the accelerator pedal

demand is high or a down-shift is

manually selected, in which case, first

gear will be selected.

In all cases the message centre will

display the current gear.

Note: If a down-shift is requested which

would normally result in an engine speed

outside the normal operating range during

sustained braking the transmission will

indicate and hold the requested gear in

the message centre display. The

transmission will then commence the

down-shift when the engine speed is

within the normal operating speed.

Limp-home mode

!WARNING:

The driver should be aware that the

vehicle’s performance will be reduced

and must take this into account when

driving. Also the use of the Jaguar

Sequential Shift paddles will be

disabled. In this event consult a Jaguar

Dealer immediately.

In the unlikely event of an electrical or

mechanical failure, transmission

operation will be limited. The vehicle gear

selector ranges P, R, N, D can still be

used to enable the vehicle to be driven to

a safe area.

Message centre display

The message centre may display the

following messages with associated

warning indicators:

ENGINE SYSTEMS FAULT (Red)

RESTRICTED PERFORMANCE (Red or

Amber)

TRANSMISSION FAULT (Amber)

If any of these messages are displayed it

is likely that loss of power or driveability

will be experienced. Seek qualified

assistance as soon as possible.

Final drive unit

Caution: Although the final drive unit is

a fill for life unit, if your vehicle is used

for a race event or test track day, then

following the event the final drive unit

lubricant should be changed. Contact

your Jaguar Dealer.

Brakes

162

Brakes

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Anti-lock braking system (ABS)

!WARNING:

•It remains the driver’s responsibility

to drive safely according to

prevailing conditions.

•The fact that a vehicle is fitted with

ABS must never allow the driver to

be tempted into taking risks which

could affect his or her safety or that

of other road users.

•The addition of ABS cannot

overcome the consequences of

trying to stop in too short a

distance, cornering at too high a

speed, or the risk of aquaplaning.

•The driver should always take road

conditions into account. A slippery

road surface always requires more

braking distance for a given speed,

even with ABS. A possible increase

in stopping distance compared to

locked wheels may occur during

ABS operation on slushy snow,

gravel, sand, or some heavily

corrugated or ridged warning

sections of road surfaces.

This system helps to prevent the road

wheels from locking and skidding during

emergency braking, assisting the driver to

maintain full steering and directional

stability.

The factor controlling ultimate stopping

distance and cornering ability is tire and

road adhesion.

ABS optimises tire to road adhesion

under maximum braking conditions

though it cannot provide increased

cornering ability.

During normal braking the ABS will not be

activated. However, if the braking force

applied begins to exceed tire to road

adhesion the ABS will automatically

activate, preventing the road wheels from

locking.

In these circumstances a pulsating effect

will be felt from the brake pedal indicating

that the system is functioning. The

pulsating effect is due to small

fluctuations in pressure supplied to the

brakes by the system to maintain full tire

and road adhesion.

Under severe braking on some road

surfaces tire noise may be apparent even

though the wheels will at no time become

locked.

ABS monitoring

Caution: Consult a Jaguar Dealer

immediately if the warning light comes

on while driving, a system failure is

indicated.

The ABS control module monitors the

ABS electrical system from ignition switch

ON to ignition system OFF. Any

malfunction will be indicated by the

anti-lock warning light coming on and a

message ABS FAULT will be displayed

by the message centre.

Should a fault develop in the ABS system,

the brake system will still operate

conventionally and with the same

standard of performance as vehicles not

equipped with ABS.

163

Brakes

Emergency Brake Assist (EBA)

!WARNING:

The EBA system is an additional safety

system; it is not intended to relieve the

driver of his or her responsibility for

exercising due care and attention when

driving.

The EBA system measures the rate at

which the brake pressure increases. If the

system detects an emergency braking

situation, EBA automatically initiates the

full braking effect. This can reduce

stopping distances in critical situations,

which can help an inexperienced driver to

stop in the same distance as an

experienced driver.

Any malfunction will be indicated by the

message BRAKE ASSIST FAULT

displayed by the message centre.

Increased brake pedal effort may be

required to slow the vehicle. Seek

qualified assistance as soon as possible.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ABS

For optimum ABS performance these

instructions on braking techniques during

ABS operation should be followed:

•Do not release brake pressure when

the pulsating effect is felt. Maintain a

constant pressure until the

manoeuvre is completed.

•To familiarise yourself with the feel of

the brake pedal during ABS braking,

practise an emergency stop

procedure, always making sure it is

safe to do so. With the seat belts fitted

to all occupants, drive the vehicle at

32 km/h (20 mph) and brake sharply.

•ABS enables the driver to steer

around obstacles during emergency

braking. However, the consequences

of turning sharply at high speed

cannot be overcome by the ABS.

•Do not attempt to pump the brakes to

avoid skidding as this can interfere

with the ABS operation. The ABS will

not allow the wheels to skid under

normal road conditions.

•The ABS will tend to keep the vehicle

straight during braking. Because

braking distances may increase under

certain road conditions, it is

necessary to plan and make turning

manoeuvres as early as possible.

Brakes

164

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE

(EPB)

The switch which operates the parkbrake

is mounted on the centre console to the

rear of the gear selector.

To engage the parkbrake 1: Pull the

parkbrake switch upwards and release.

The switch will return to the neutral

position. The parkbrake warning/brake

fluid low warning light on the instrument

cluster will illuminate.

The Drive Away Release feature allows

the parkbrake to release automatically as

the vehicle is driven away.

To disengage the parkbrake 2: With the

ignition system in the ON position or with

the engine running, apply the foot brake

and press the parkbrake switch down.

If the parkbrake is applied while the

vehicle is stationary and D or R is

selected, applying the throttle will

automatically release the parkbrake.

The parkbrake is also automatically

released when the gear selector is moved

from the P position.

Inadvertent operation of the parkbrake

whilst the vehicle is in motion, abov

3 km/h (1.8 mph), will cause the message

PARK BRAKE APPLIED to be displayed

on the message centre, the warning light

in the instrument cluster will be

illuminated and a warning chime will

sound.

If the parkbrake is applied whilst the

vehicle is moving, releasing the switch will

disengage the parkbrake. The parkbrake

cannot be applied whilst the vehicle is

moving and the throttle pressed.

Note: If the vehicle is in motion, the

parkbrake should only be used as an

emergency brake.

Caution: Take care that the vehicle is

safely parked to prevent it from rolling

if you wish to leave the parkbrake off.

However, it is advisable to always use

the parkbrake.

The warning light in the instrument cluster

will remain on for a short time if the

parkbrake is applied when the ignition

system is reverted to the convenience

mode, see page 42.

If a fault in the system is detected, a

message PARK BRAKE FAULT or

CANNOT APPLY PARK BRAKE will be

displayed. Seek qualified assistance as

soon as possible.

If the battery has been discharged or

disconnected a message APPLYFOOT

AND PARKBRAKE will be displayed

when the ignition is next switched on.

Depress the footbrake and pull the

parkbrake switch up to apply the

parkbrake. This is required to reset the

parkbrake system. The parkbrake will

now function correctly.

JAG0045L

1 2

165

Stability Control

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Dynamic stability control (DSC)

!WARNING:

The fact that the vehicle is fitted with

DSC must never allow the driver to be

tempted into taking risks which could

affect his/her safety or that of other

road users. In all cases it remains the

driver’s responsibility to drive safely

according to the prevailing conditions.

Dynamic stability control is operational

whenever the engine is running, unless it

has been switched off. When the system

is operating, the warning light in the

instrument cluster will flash.

The DSC system controls the anti-lock

braking system (ABS), traction control

and yaw control of the vehicle.

The DSC system assists the driver in

retaining directional control of the vehicle

in situations where the vehicle is sliding

(understeer or oversteer). It must not

encourage the driver to drive beyond the

limit of adhesion or at speeds higher than

those suitable for the prevailing road and

traffic conditions.

It applies braking pressure to individual

wheels if excessive variation is detected.

This ensures that the vehicle follows the

driver’s intended direction of travel.

Traction control will intervene to prevent

wheel spin by automatically reducing the

power output from the engine and

applying braking to individual wheels.

This improves acceleration, particularly

on surfaces with uneven friction, for

example, one wheel on ice the other on

tarmac.

Trac dynamic stability control (Trac

DSC)

Trac DSC is an additional feature where

DSC settings are optimised for maximum

traction in difficult conditions, such as

deep snow, sand or gravel. This makes

greater traction possible, without having

to completely lose the benefits of DSC,

however, vehicle stability may be

reduced.

Caution: Vehicle safety could be

reduced by inappropriate use of Trac

DSC. Trac DSC should only be used

when necessary for the prevailing

conditions:

•In deep snow.

•To maintain the movement of the

vehicle on soft or loose surfaces

e.g. gravel, sand.

•When snow chains are fitted.

Stability Control

166

USING STABILITY CONTROL

Switching between DSC and Trac DSC

- All vehicles

•Press and hold the DSC switch for

less than three seconds.

•The message centre will temporarily

display either Trac DSC or DSC ON.

•The warning light on the instrument

cluster will illuminate while Trac DSC

is selected.

•The warning light will flash when DSC

or Trac DSC is active.

Note: If cruise control is engaged it will

automatically disengage if stability control

activates.

Switching between DSC OFF and ON -

Normally aspirated engines only

Switching DSC OFF:

•Press and hold the DSC switch for

more than three seconds.

•The message centre will temporarily

display DSC OFF and a warning

chime will sound.

•The warning light on the instrument

cluster will illuminate.

Switching DSC ON:

If DSC is OFF:

•Press and release the DSC switch.

•The DSC system will switch on, the

message centre will temporarily

display DSC ON.

•The warning light on the instrument

cluster will be extinguished.

Stability control indicator - All vehicles

A system malfunction is indicated by the

message DSC NOT AVAILABLE in the

message centre and the amber priority

warning light. The instrument cluster

warning light will also be lit.

It is safe to drive the vehicle but the DSC

system will not activate under wheel spin

or slide conditions. You should seek

qualified assistance as soon as possible.

Computer active technology system

(CATS)

If the message centre displays the

message CATS SYSTEM FAULT, a fault

has been detected in the adaptive

damping system. Seek qualified

assistance as soon as possible.

JAG0262L

167

Parking Aid

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

!WARNING:

•It remains the driver’s responsibility

to be vigilant when reversing. Small

children or animals may not be

detected by the system.

•It remains the driver’s responsibility

to detect obstacles and estimate

the car’s distance from them. Some

overhanging objects, barriers, thin

obstructions or painted surfaces

which could possibly cause

damage to the vehicle may not be

detected by the system. Always be

vigilant when reversing.

Caution:

•Once the system has been

activated by selecting reverse or

using the switch, the rear sensors

are active when the gear selector is

in neutral. Therefore, if an obstacle

is detected a tone will sound.

•Objects moving away from the

vehicle will be reported. However,

whilst driving away, object warning

may be temporarily reported due to

ground reflection.

The Park Assist System is automatically in

standby when the ignition is turned on.

USING THE PARKING AID

Touch-screen

To set the preferences of the parking

assist, the settings are accessed via the

touch-screen Home screen and Veh.

settings.

Select Parking (1).

There is a link to Vol. presets in order that

the volume of the parking assist warning

beeps may be adjusted.

Note: The volume adjusts both front and

rear speaker volume.

When the reverse parking aid is active, a

pop-up screen is initiated displaying the

area of the vehicle. This can be cancelled

by touching the screen within the pop-up

area.

mirror dip

Vol. presets

Off On

Vehicle

Security

Parking

Valet mode

Reverse

12 : 26 pm

JAG0264NAS

Home

Audio

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

Valet

12 : 26 pm

Parking Aid Alert

JAG0265NAS

Parking Aid

168

Rear parking aid

When reverse gear is selected and the

ignition is on, if obstacles are detected

within operating range, as shown in the

illustration below, the rear parking assist

automatically provides an audible

proximately warning to the nearest

detected object.

1 is approximately 60 cm (24 inches).

2 is approximately 180 cm (71 inches).

The beep tone increases in rate as the

vehicle approaches the obstacle.

The rear parking assist beep will become

continuous when the obstacle is detected

at or within 30 cm (12 inches) from the

vehicle.

Note: The outer rear sensors 1 will show

visual detection on the message centre

before the audible warning is given.

Rear fitted accessories

Particular care must be taken when

reversing with rear fitted accessories e.g.

bicycle carrier, as the rear park assist will

only indicate the distance from the

bumper to the obstacle.

System Fault

The parking assist may sound spurious

tones if it detects a frequency tone using

the same band as the sensors.

Cleaning the Sensors

Do not clean the sensors with abrasive or

sharp objects or materials.

For reliable operation, the sensors in the

rear bumpers should be kept free from

ice, frost and grime.

When using a high pressure spray the

sensors should only be sprayed briefly

and not from a distance of less than

20 cm (8 inches).

JAG0267G

JAG0270G

169

Cruise Control

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

The cruise (speed) control system can be

used by the driver to maintain a selected

vehicle speed above 30 km/h (18mph)

without the driver having to use the

accelerator.

Adjustment controls on the steering

wheel allow the driver manual control of

the system. Brake and clutch operations

also influence the cruise control system.

SPEED ADJUSTMENT CONTROL 1

thumb wheel is used to engage cruise

control initially by rolling it upwards. It is

also used to increase or decrease the set

speed.

CANCEL 2 cancels cruise control but

retains the set speed in memory.

RESUME 3 engages cruise control after it

has been cancelled.

USING THE CRUISE CONTROL

Setting vehicle speed

!WARNING:

Only use cruise control when

conditions are favourable, for example,

straight, dry, open roads with light

traffic.

When you are travelling at the speed you

require, which must be above 30 km/h

(18 mph), roll the speed adjustment

control 1 upwards or downwards to

increase or decrease speed.

Cruise control will engage and maintain

the set speed and you can remove your

foot from the accelerator pedal.

Note: Cruise control will automatically

disengage when the brake pedal is

pressed or when the vehicle speed falls

below 30 km/h (18 mph).

Changing the speed

There are two ways to change the set

speed:

•Accelerate or decelerate to the

desired speed then roll the speed

adjustment control upwards (+).

•Increase or decrease the speed by

rolling the speed adjustment control

upwards (+) or downwards (-) until the

desired speed is obtained.

JAG0035G

JAG0272G

Cruise Control

170

Note: The set speed can be increase or

decrease the speed in steps of 1 mph

(2 km/h) by rolling the speed adjustment

control upwards (+) or downwards (-)

briefly until the desired speed is obtained.

Resuming the speed

If the vehicle is accelerated above the set

speed, then the set speed will be resumed

when the accelerator pedal is released.

If CANCEL is pressed, or the brake pedal

is pressed, the cruise control will

disengage but the set speed memory will

be retained. Press RESUME and the

vehicle will return to the set speed.

Note: Cruise control will not resume at

speeds below 30 km/h (18 mph).

RESUME will not operate if the ignition

has been turned OFF.

Caution:

•RESUME should only be used if the

driver is aware of the set speed and

intends to return to it.

•It is not recommended to resume

set speed when a low gear is

selected as excessive engine

speeds will occur.

Cruise control will switch OFF and clear

the memory when:

•The ignition system is switched OFF.

•A fault occurs. The cruise control

system will switch OFF and cannot be

used until the fault is cleared.

Automatic switch off

Cruise control will switch off but the set

speed will remain in the memory when:

•The CANCEL button is pressed.

•The brake pedal is pressed.

•Speed falls below 30 km/h (18 mph).

•Neutral, Park or Reverse gear

positions are selected.

•Dynamic stability control is operating.

•The difference between the actual and

set speed is too great.

•When the vehicle reaches a maximum

speed of 192 km/h (120 mph).

•The accelerator pedal is used to

accelerate beyond the set speed for

too long a period.

171

Cruise Control

Message centre information displays

Message Warning

Light

Priority

Indicator

Meaning

CRUISE

ENGAGED

None None Displayed when cruise control

system is operating.

CRUISE

OVERRIDE

None None Driver is pressing the accelerator

pedal overriding cruise control

function. Message will disappear

when accelerator pedal is

released and cruise control

speed is resumed.

CRUISE

CANCELLED

None None Driver has cancelled cruise

control or is braking.

CRUISE NOT

AVAILABLE

None None Cruise control or adaptive cruise

control malfunction.

Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)

180

Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

!WARNING:

Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) set

speeds must be within local speed

restriction limits. The driver must

always ensure that a safe speed is set,

taking into account the prevailing

traffic and road conditions.

ASL can be used in a situation where

varying vehicle speed is likely but a

maximum speed must not be exceeded.

For example, where a local speed limit is

80km/h (50mph), the set speed could be

at that limit or just under. The driver is

then safe in the knowledge that the local

speed limit cannot be exceeded while

ASL is operating.

If ASL is not selected, cruise control is

always available by simply rotating the

thumb wheel on the right hand side of the

steering wheel to set a cruising speed.

The ASL button allows the driver to select

between cruise control and the automatic

speed limiter. The ASL can be set to any

speed between 30km/h (18mph) and

240 km/h (150 mph).

When ASL is selected, the instrument

panel telltale status light will illuminate.

When the ASL button is pressed again,

the light will extinguish, ASL will be

cancelled and cruise control will be

available again.

USING THE ASL

Setting a speed limit

1. Press the ASL button.

2. Use the thumb wheel 1 to set the

required speed.

While a speed is being set or altered

the message centre display in the

instrument panel will show the

selected speed.

3. The set speed can be adjusted at any

time by rotating the thumb wheel 1.

Note: The message is also displayed at

other times as an information display.

JAG0500N

LIMITER SET

XXX MPH

AG0479G

181

Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)

When ASL is selected and a set speed

inserted, the engine will respond normally

up to the set speed. Further accelerator

pedal pressure will not increase the

vehicle speed beyond your set speed

Suspending ASL

ASL can be suspended by pressing the

CANCEL button 3. Applying sudden,

rapid acceleration (kickdown) will also

suspend ASL.

Resuming ASL

If ASL has been suspended, it can be

reinstated with a single press of the

RESUME button 2, however, ASL will

only reinstate if the vehicle speed is less

than the current speed set in memory and

greater than 30km/h (18mph). The

message centre will display an

appropriate message if the vehicle speed

is too fast to resume ASL.

Exceeding the set speed

If the set speed is exceeded, e.g. on a

steep downhill section, the message

centre will display an appropriate

message along with an amber warning

light.

There are three categories of over limit

displays:

1. If the set speed is exceeded by up to

15km/h (9mph), the message centre

will display the message along with an

amber warning light

2. If the set speed is exceeded by more

than 15km/h (9mph), the message

centre will display the message along

with a flashing amber warning light.

3. If the set speed is exceeded by more

than 15km/h (9mph) for a duration of

five seconds, the message centre will

display the message along with a

flashing amber warning light and also

give an audible warning tone.

Use your brakes to rectify the situation.

ASL unavailable

If ASL is not available due to a fault, the

message centre will display an

appropriate message along with an

amber warning light.

The message and warning light will

display continuously while ASL is

selected. See Information Displays, page

118.

When the ignition is switched off, ASL is

deactivated and any set speed is deleted

from memory.

LIMITER

CANCELLED

TOO FAST TO

RESUME

OVER LIMIT

XXX MPH

LIMITER NOT

AVAILABLE

Audio

182

Audio

RADIO RECEPTION

Your radio receives signals whilst on the

move, and may experience widely

differing reception characteristics.

Because of this, some interference is to

be expected from time to time during a

journey.

FM transmitters can only broadcast over

a limited range, and good clear signals

will only be received in the immediate area

of the transmitter. When travelling,

occasionally it may be necessary to

re-tune the radio to offset the effects of

moving from one transmitter area to

another.

While automatic re-tuning helps to reduce

the effects of signal changes, some

manual re-tuning may still be required

(especially for local stations) in areas of

weak reception.

The broadcast range for good stereo

reception is within approximately

48 - 64 km (30 - 40 miles) of the

transmitter.

FM Signals travel in a straight line, so

large obstacles, such as tall buildings,

can shield the car from the signal causing

distortion or loss of reception (known as

dead spots).

Distortion can also occur if FM signals

received directly from the transmitter, mix

with signals deflected by obstructions

such as mountains, hills, and tall

buildings. This is known as multi-path

distortion.

Note: Although distortion, interference

and lack of signal clarity are sometimes

attributed to a fault in the radio, this is

rarely the case.

JAG0282G

183

Audio

GENERAL INFORMATION

The sound system is available in two

versions:

The Jaguar Sound System comprises a

radio and in-dash 6 compact disc (CD)

player and door mounted speakers and

additional speakers in rear quarters.

The Jaguar Premium Surround Sound

System comprises a radio and in-dash 6

compact disc (CD) player, with upgraded

speakers mounted in the doors and rear

quarters, plus an additional speaker

mounted in the fascia and a sub-woofer

mounted in the passenger foot well under

the carpet.

This speaker configuration allows the

reproduction of audio in stereo, 3-channel

or Dolby Pro Logic II Surround Sound.

The audio system can be controlled from

the switches on the touch-screen

console, the touch-screen buttons and

from the multi-function controls on the

left-hand side of the steering wheel.

These controls are described in the

Steering Wheel section on page 64.

Audio system care

Caution:

•Care must be taken to avoid spilling

or splashing drinks onto the audio

unit. In the event of such an

occurrence advise your Jaguar

Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

•The audio unit may be damaged if

unsuitable items like credit cards or

coins are pushed inside the CD

aperture.

Compact discs (CDs)

When handling CDs, do not touch the

playing surface. CDs should be stored in

their cases away from direct sunlight,

heat and dust. Scratches, finger marks or

dust on the surface of a disc can cause

the optical pick-up to skip tracks. If the

surface of a CD is dirty, use an

appropriate CD cleaner.

Do not attempt to play discs that are

damaged, warped, cracked or of

incorrect size. They can seriously damage

the unit’s play-back mechanism.

Aerial operation

Caution: When using an automatic car

wash ensure that the audio system is

turned OFF so that the aerial is

retracted. Ensure that enough time is

given for the aerial to fully retract.

The aerial automatically rises when the

audio system is switched ON. The aerial

will lower when the audio system is

switched OFF.

Note: The aerial will always be raised

regardless of being in AM/FM or CD mode

to enable RDS information (where

available) to be received.

It is important to clean the aerial

periodically to maintain smooth operation

and good reception, see page 228.

Caution: Do not attempt to raise the

aerial manually.

Audio

184

AUDIO UNIT OVERVIEW

The Audio Unit is located in the

touch-screen console, and is controlled

by touch-screen buttons 1 and hard

buttons 2- 9).

1. Touch-screen: See page 121.

2. Load: Press to load CD, see page

195.

3. Eject: Press to eject CD, see page

195.

4. Seek up: Press arrow to seek radio

frequency range up or to change CD

track up.

5. Seek down: Press arrow to seek

radio frequency range down or to

change CD track down.

6. Source: Press to change radio band

or to change the source media

between radio or CD.

7. Audio system ON/OFF and volume:

Press the control knob to switch the

system ON/OFF.

Volume control: Turn the control

knob to increase or decrease volume.

Any volume setting made whilst in

audio, phone, navigation or voice

activation mode, will be memorised

for that system.

8. CD load and eject slot.

WABC WFAN

WXRK WNYC WPLJ

WQXR WHTZ WHUD

WCBS

Settings

Audio

12 : 26 pm

Autostore

PTY 3CH

AM 770 WABC

Text sent by station

JAG0015NAS

185

Audio

USING THE AUDIO SYSTEM

The Audio system touch-screen structure

flow charts are referenced at page 127.

To operate the audio system the ignition

system must be ON (engine Start/Stop

button pressed). When the engine is

stopped, for the audio system to remain

active, the START/STOP button must be

pressed again without pressing the brake

pedal.

The audio system can be turned ON in

two ways:

Pressing the audio ON/OFF control knob

on the touch-screen console, or

Pressing the Audio touch-screen button

on the main Home touch-screen.

The touch-screen displays the current

audio settings.

Radio broadcast system display panel

(in AM/FM mode)

JAG0284G

Home

Audio

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

71 70

F F

.5 .0

Valet

AUDIO OFF

12 : 26 pm

JAG0283NAS PTY Priority Programme Type

selected.

DPL II,

3CH

Surround mode - Dolby Pro

Logic II or 3CH.

FM2 Frequency channel

selected.

89.1 Frequency of selected

station.

WCBS Radio station selected.

Home

Audio

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

71 70

F F

.5 .0

Valet

Radio

90.7 FM1

KALX

12 : 26 pm

JAG0285NAS

Settings

Audio

PTY 3CH

AM 770 WABC

Text sent by station

WABC WFAN

WXRP WNYC WPLJ

WQXR WHTZ WHUD

Autostore

WCBS

12 : 26 pm

JAG0286NAS

PTY 3CH

AM 770 WABC

Audio

186

1. AM/FM band switching.

2. Radio text sent by radio station.

3. Settings.

4. Autostore.

5. Seek up and Seek down.

6. Preset memorised radio stations.

RADIO SYSTEM OPERATION

AM/FM band switching

Pressing AM/FM will cycle the radio

through FM1, FM2 and AM. Band

selection will be shown in the display

panel. When a CD is being played,

pressing the band switch will select radio

operation.

Radio text sent by station

Radio text messages sent out by the

selected station.

To set the display to show radio text

messages see Settings - Options -FM

text.

A pop-up display screen is available,

showing the whole of the message, by

pressing the continuation arrow.

The pop-up will time out after

approximately 12 seconds, or can be

cancelled by touching anywhere within

the pop-up. Pressing the FM text off

button will cancel the display for Radio

text entirely.

Settings

Audio

PTY 3CH

AM 770 WABC

Text sent by station

WABC WFAN

WXRP WNYC WPLJ

WQXR WHTZ WHUD

Autostore

WCBS

12 : 26 pm

12 3

JAG0286NAS

WABC WFAN

WXRP WNYC WPLJ

WQXR WHTZ WHUD

WCBS

Settings

Audio

PTY 3CH

AM 770 WABC

Text sent by station

Autostore

12 : 26 pm

JAG0019NAS

FM2 AMFM1

Settings

Audio

PTY 3CH

FM 102.6 WPLJ

Text sent by station

WABC WFAN

WXRP WNYC WPLJ

WQXR WHTZ WHUD

Autostore

WCBS

12 : 26 pm

JAG0288NAS

Text sent by station

Home

Audio

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

Valet

FM text

FM text off

The latest news headlines from WPLG.

12 : 26 pm

JAG0289NAS

187

Audio

Settings

When selected, displays the available

audio system setting facilities.

Sound: Bass, Treble levels are increased

or decreased by pressing the (+) or (-)

buttons.

Balance, left to right, and Fade, rear to

front, levels are optimised for a selected

seating position by pressing the L or R, R

or F buttons.

Options

Priority PTY interrupt skip: Interruptions

for, NEWS or other selected priority PTY,

can be skipped by pressing the skip

button 1. This will cancel the pop-up and

the announcement. The radio will return

to the previously selected audio source.

Pressing anywhere within the pop-up 2

will cancel the pop-up but the

announcement will continue.

Note:

•

Interrupt skip will not cancel activation

of a priority PTY and it will remain

ready for the next interrupt.

•

PTY and priority PTY features are

reliant upon the broadcast information

from radio stations, and may be much

better in some areas than others.

FM text is selected either ON or OFF.

PTY (Programme type, where broadcast)

This has two functions:

•to set a desired priority programme

type

•to search for a programme type (PTY

Search) and re-tune to it.

Settings

Audio

PTY 3CH

AM 770 WABC

Text sent by station

WABC WFAN

WXRP WNYC WPLJ

WQXR WHTZ WHUD

Autostore

WCBS

12 : 26 pm

JAG0286NAS

Audio

Sound

Options

PTY

Treble

Bass

Balance

Fade

Settings

12 : 26 pm

JAG0291NAS

Audio

Sound

Options

PTY

Settings

FM text Off

14 : 26 pm

JAG0292NAS

Audio

188

Use the scroll buttons to cycle through

the available programme types (there are

30 types available), press the required

menu buttons to select the desired

programme types.

Priority programme type

Select the required priority programme,

then select the previous screen button.

The radio will now wait for RBDS

information to indicate that a station has

changed its programme type, e.g. to

NEWS. The radio will now re-tune to the

new station for the duration that it remains

on that programme type.

If the current station is already on the

selected priority programme type, then

when this station is lost, the radio will

attempt to find another with the correct

programme type.

Note: PTY interrupt feature is also active

in the CD mode.

PTY search

Once a desired programme type is

selected press the PTY search button. If

there is a station with the correct PTY,

then the radio will re-tune to it. If not, the

radio will indicate NO PTY and return to

the current station.

While PTY is displayed, a search of the

set PTY programmes can be carried out

by pressing the seek down or seek up

buttons.

Clear all will cancel ALL the selected

priority settings, except for PTY-Alarm,

and the PTY indicator will clear from the

display,

PTY-Alarm (where broadcast)

When using the radio with RBDS

selected, a PTY-Alert service may be

activated from the menu, to alert on any

crises of major national importance.

When such a broadcast is made, ALERT

will appear in the audio display. The

default setting is ON.

Audio

Sound

Options

PTY

Settings

Sound

Options

PTY

Rock

News

Information

Sports

Talk

Clear all

PTY

12 : 26 pm

JAG0295NAS

Audio

Sound

Options

PTY

Settings

Sound

Options

PTY

Alert

Personality

Public

College

Weather

Clear all

PTY

12 : 26 pm

JAG0296NAS

189

Audio

Seek tuning

The seek down or seek up buttons on

the touch-screen console and the

touch-screen carry out the same function.

Short press: In AM or FM mode, pressing

and releasing the seek down (left-hand)

or seek up (right-hand) buttons 1 will

activate the radio tuning through the

frequency range, up or down, to the next

available station.

The touch-screen will display Seek on the

upper display until a station has been

found, and will then display the station

name, where available.

Long press: In AM or FM mode, for as

long as the button is being pressed the

frequencies will be scanned either up or

down.

The touch-screen will display manual on

the upper display for a short time. While

this is displayed, a short press of the

buttons will also allow the frequencies to

be scanned.

Autostore

Autostore: The automatic memory

function programmes up to nine strong

stations on a selected waveband to

presets 1 to 9.

To activate this function, press and hold

Autostore button for at least two

seconds.

The radio will be briefly muted while it

searches the selected waveband (AM,

FM) for up to nine strong stations.

When programming is completed the

radio will default to preset number 1, and

audio volume will be restored.

If stations cannot be located for all the

preset positions, those that are found will

be allocated positions commencing with

number 1, leaving the remainder not

programmed. The display will show ----

and be greyed out if unprogrammed

preset are selected.

Settings

Audio

Autostore

PTY 3CH

FM 97.5 Seek

WABC WFAN

WXRP WNYC WPLJ

WQXR WHTZ WHUD

WCBS

12 : 26 pm

JAG0297NAS

Seek

Settings

Audio Manual

Autostore

PTY 3CH

FM 97.5

WABC WFAN

WXRP WNYC WPLJ

WQXR WHTZ WHUD

WCBS

12 : 26 pm

JAG0298NAS

Manual

Settings

Audio

Autostore

PTY 3CH

FM 97.5

WABC WFAN

WXRP WNYC WPLJ

WQXR WHTZ WHUD

WCBS

12 : 26 pm

JAG0299NAS

Audio

190

When programmes have been set: A

short press of Autostore will allow the

user to switch between the automatically

stored stations and the manually stored

stations.

Preset memorised radio stations (1 - 9)

!WARNING:

In the interests of road safety, do not

attempt to preset a station while

driving.

On each waveband (AM, FM1, FM2), nine

stations can be memorised using the

touch-screen keypad buttons. After

tuning to a station, press and hold the

selected button until the station has been

stored. A station can be recalled from the

preset memory by pressing and

immediately releasing the button.

A long press of the steering wheel preset

selector button will cycle through the

preset stations.

Automatic volume control (AVC)

This maintains radio volume at a level

sufficient to overcome road noise as

vehicle speed increases or decreases.

To activate the AVC:

•From the main Home touch-screen

menu, select Vehicle.

•Select Syst. settings.

•Select Vol. presets.

•Select either Low, Medium or High for

the AVC.

Jaguar Premium Surround Sound

This audio system has the facility of

Digital Signal Processing (DSP) which

optimises the sound for specific seating

positions.

It also allows the user to select stereo,

3-channel stereo or Dolby Pro Logic II

Surround Sound. It is recommended that

Dolby Pro Logic II Surround Sound is

used in CD mode and strong FM

transmissions.

Note:

•

When various setting are altered in

DSP, the sound will briefly fade while

the settings are changing and will

return to normal when the change has

been completed.

•

Convertible only: The sound will

automatically change for when the

convertible top is up or down.

Settings

Audio

Autostore

KSAN

PTY 3CH

FM 93.5

WABC WFAN

WXRP KSAN WPLJ

WQXR WHTZ WHUD

WCBS

12 : 26 pm

JAG0300NAS

Vehicle

Display set

Preferences

Button audio

Navigation

Vol. presets

AVC Low Medium High

12 : 26 pm

JAG0301NAS

191

Audio

Settings

When selected, defaults to Sound and

displays the available premium audio

system setting facilities.

•Stereo, 1

•3 Ch, 2

•Dolby Pro Logic II Surround Sound,

These levels are altered by selecting the

appropriate buttons.

Bass, Treble, Sub levels are increased or

decreased by pressing the (+) or (-)

buttons for the system facilities.

To select further settings, use the scroll

down button to access the next screen

display.

Select either Centre or Surround.

Note: The number of available settings

will depend on whether Stereo, 3Ch or

Dolby Pro Logic II Surround Sound is

selected.

Settings

Audio

PTY 3CH

AM 770 WABC

Text sent by station

WABC WFAN

WXRP WNYC WPLJ

WQXR WHTZ WHUD

Autostore

WCBS

12 : 26 pm

JAG0286NAS

Audio Settings

Sound

Bal/Fade

Options

Base

Treble

Sub

Stereo 3 Ch.

DSP

PLII

PTY

12 : 26 pm

JAG0303NAS

Audio Settings

Sound

Bal/Fade

Options

Base

Treble

Sub

Stereo 3 Ch.

DSP

PLII

PTY

12 : 26 pm

JAG0306NAS

Audio Settings

Sound

Bal/Fade

Options

Base

Treble

Sub

Stereo 3 Ch.

DSP

PLII

PTY

12 : 26 pm

JAG0307NAS

Audio Settings

Sound

Bal/Fade

Options

Center

Surround

PTY

12 : 26 pm

JAG0308NAS

Audio

192

DSP (Digital Signal Processing): To

optimise the sound for specific seating

positions select DSP and then select the

required seating position.

Either Front, Driver or All may be

selected.

Bal/Fade: The sound can be optimised

by using the scrolling buttons to alter the

Balance (left to right) and Fade (front to

rear).

Options and PTY functions are the same

as for the Jaguar Sound System, refer to

Settings on page 187.

RADIO BROADCAST DATA

SYSTEM (RBDS)

Your radio is equipped with RBDS, which

enables the audio unit to receive

additional information with normal radio

signals.

When tuned to certain stations on the FM

waveband the radio decodes signals

transmitted to provide the following

functions (dependent upon the service

available from the broadcasters).

Note: Not all FM radio stations broadcast

RBDS. If a non-RBDS station is received,

RBDS features will not be available.

•RBDS station name display:

When RBDS is selected the station

name is displayed.

•RDS Priority programme type auto

re-tuning (where broadcast):

Can be selected to interrupt and

switch to the selected programme

type e.g. News, for its duration or can

be used to search for specific PTY

stations.

If the RBDS function does not respond

correctly, see the trouble-shooting guide

on the next page.

Audio Settings

Sound

Bal/Fade

Options

Base

Treble

Sub

Stereo 3 Ch.

DSP

PLII

PTY

12 : 26 pm

JAG0304NAS

Audio Settings

DSP

Front

Driver

All

12 : 26 pm

JAG0305NAS

Audio Settings

Sound

Bal/Fade

Options

PTY

12 : 26 pm

JAG0309NAS

193

Audio

RBDS trouble-shooting guide

Incorrect response from RBDS Reason and rectification

Radio does not display programme

name.

RBDS name is not available from the broadcast.

Station name is lost and displays

frequency only.

Radio has lost reception of the RBDS data due

to vehicle moving out of transmitter range, loss

of signal in a tunnel, under a garage forecourt

canopy, or similar screening. If the latter is the

case, when the vehicle is clear of the screening,

the station name will return after a short delay.

Audio

194

COMPACT DISC (CD) SYSTEM

OPERATION

Caution:

•Copyright laws vary in different

countries; check the laws in your

country if you want to record from

•Due to technical incompatibility,

recordable (CD-R) discs and

re-writable (CD-RW) discs may not

function correctly.

•These CD units will play compact

discs that conform to the

international Red Book standard

audio specification. Copy protected

CDs from some manufacturers do

not conform to this standard and

playback cannot be guaranteed.

•Dual format, dual sided discs (DVD

Plus, CD-DVD format), now being

adopted by the music industry, are

thicker than normal CDs and

consequently playback cannot be

guaranteed in Jaguar audio units,

and jamming could occur. Warranty

claims, where this type of disc is

found to be inside an audio unit

returned for repair, will not be

accepted.

•Irregular shaped CDs and CDs with

a scratch protection film or self

adhesive labels attached should

not be used.

Note: Some privately recorded CD-R

discs may not have been acceptably

formatted to be able to be played on this

CD player.

An in-dash 6 compact disc (CD) player is

installed in the touch-screen console, see

page 184, and it will accommodate up to

six discs. It will play Compact Disc Digital

Audio (CDDA) discs (normal discs), MP3

and WMA files.

The main Home screen display will

indicate which CD slot is loaded and

ready for playing. If no CDs have been

loaded, the touch-screen indicates the

unloaded state by displaying the six

ghosted discs.

To access the CD player touch-screen:

•From the main Home touch-screen

menu, select Audio.

•Select CD.

Home

Audio

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

Valet

12 : 26 pm

Tr 3

03:42

71 70

F F

.5 .0

JAG0310NAS

Settings

Audio

PTY 3CH

AM 770 WABC

Text sent by station

WABC WFAN

WXRP WNYC WPLJ

WQXR WHTZ WHUD

Autostore

WCBS

12 : 26 pm

JAG0311NAS

195

Audio

To load the CD player

Single CD - player empty:

Load a CD into the loading slot. A CD

loading message is displayed on the

touch-screen.

Single CD - player partially loaded:

From the CD player touch-screen, select

an empty slot 2, 1 indicates the current

playing CD, 3 indicates loaded slots. A

message indicates to insert the CD into

the empty slot. Load a CD into the slot.

More than one CD:

Press the LOAD button and insert each

CD into an CD slot as requested by the

displayed message. A pop-up message

on the screen will indicate which slot is

being selected until the unit is fully

loaded.

When the CD player has been loaded, CD

operation is via the CD touch-screen.

To unload the CD player

Press the eject button. A short press will

eject a single CD, a long press will eject

each loaded CD in turn.

JAG0312G

Settings

Audio

123456

00:00

12 : 26 pm

Mix Repeat

AM FM

JAG0313NAS 1 2 3

JAG0314G

JAG0315G

Audio

196

CD Touch-screen display and

operation

When a CD has been selected, the upper

display indicates which disc is being

loaded and will commence playing when

loading has been completed.

TR12 - Track number display of the track

being played.

03:47 - Track elapsed time play.

Seek down and seek up buttons:

•Short press: Seeks down to previous

track or up to next track.

•Long press: Press the seek down to

play rapidly back through one or more

tracks (review). Press the seek up to

play rapidly forward through one or

more tracks (cue). Normal playback

will resume when either button is

released.

II - Pause button; Will pause the playing

track until pressed again. To resume the

CD, press again.

Mix CD: Short press: The track order of

play from the current CD is randomly

selected by the CD player, (on MP3 CDs a

short press will mix the tracks from the

current folder).

Mix all: Long press: The CD order of play

is randomly selected, by the CD player,

from all the loaded CDs, (on MP3 CDs a

long press will mix the tracks from all the

folders of the current MP3 disc).

Note: If the volume is turned down to

zero, the CD is automatically paused. Play

is resumed when the volume is increased.

DPLII

3CH

Surround mode - Dolby Pro

Logic II selected or 3-channel.

Settings

Audio

123456

12 : 26 pm

Mix Repeat

AM FM

3CH

Loading CD 1

JAG0316NAS

3CH

Loading CD 1

Settings

Audio

123456

12 : 26 pm

Mix Repeat

AM FM

3CH

12 03 47

JAG0318NAS

03 47Tr 12

Settings

Audio

123456

12 : 26 pm

Mix Repeat

AM FM

3CH

12 03 47Mix CD

JAG0319NAS

Mix CD Mix all

197

Audio

Repeat:

•Short press: Rpt Tr: Will repeat the

playing of the track continuously until

repeat is cancelled by pressing again.

•Long press: Rpt CD: Will repeat the

playing of the whole CD continuously

until repeat is cancelled by pressing

again.

Settings

When selected, displays the available CD

system setting facilities similar to the

audio system, see pages 187 and 191.

Options: CD text can be selected in the

CD mode.

The CD text display is similar to the Radio

text, but displays text that has been

recorded onto the CD (not all CDs have

CD text).

COMPACT DISC -

RECORDABLE (CD-R)

Some pre-recorded and personally

recorded discs, can contain additional

information on the disc, e.g. CD titles,

track titles and the artists name (ID 3

Tags).

Additional buttons allow you to select

folders and tracks and display various

items of information about the recordings.

Typically, MP3 discs have the potential to

hold a great deal more music than a

conventional CD because each track can

be compressed to a higher degree during

recording.

If you record your own music, each

session must be properly closed, but the

whole disc does not have to be finalised.

Note:

•

A mixture of CDs and MP3 discs can

be loaded into the CD player together.

Settings

Audio

123456

12 : 26 pm

Mix Repeat

AM FM

3CH

12 03 47Mix CD

JAG0320NAS

Rpt Tr Rpt CD

Settings

Audio

123456

12 : 26 pm

Mix Repeat

AM FM

3CH

12 03 47Mix CD

JAG0321NAS

Audio

Sound

Options

PTY

Settings

CD text Off

14 : 26 pm

JAG0322NAS

Audio

198

•

The CD player is not guaranteed to

play every disc available because of

variations in the quality of discs.

Playing MP3 discs

If the MP3 disc has been recorded with

the music files contained within folders,

additional information is available by

selecting Folders.

The titles of any tracks and folders

recorded on the CD will be displayed in

alphabetical order as the disc may be

recorded in another order.

Select the folder to access the tracks

contained within the folder.

MP3 folder and track format

A CD-R or CD-RW can have MP3 folders

and tracks recorded in many different

ways, with many layers of folders and with

tracks distributed throughout the folder

structure.

To minimise the loading on the system, a

rigid folder structure is recommended.

Note:

•

Any CD containing a mixture of MP3

and CDDA tracks will be treated as a

CD (any MP3 tracks will be ignored).

•

The CD player may take a long time

(one minute or more) to load an MP3

disc owing to the number of tracks on

it.

Settings

Audio

123456

12 : 26 pm

Mix Repeat

AM FM

3CH

Folders

JAG0323NAS

Audio

12 : 26 pm

AM FM

3CH

00 00CD 3

Please Please Me

Beatles-Hits

Revolver

Sgt. Pepper's

Help

JAG0324NAS

Audio

12 : 26 pm

AM FM

3CH

00 00CD 3

Eleanor Rigby

Revolver

I'm Only Sleeping

Love You To

Taxman

JAG0325NAS

199

Satellite Radio

SATELLITE DIGITAL AUDIO

RADIO SERVICE (SDARS)

Signals from a satellite broadcast radio

service are encoded and a subscription to

the broadcast operator (SIRIUS) is

required to receive them.

The following features are inhibited when

driving:

•Parental lock.

•Channel skip.

•Edit favourites - song seek list.

As a digital signal is used, satellite radio is

able to provide output of radio broadcasts

with the sound quality and clarity of CD

playback.

RECEIVING SATELLITE RADIO

BROADCASTS

To access satellite radio from the vehicle

Home screen:

•Select Audio on the touch-screen.

•Select Sat Radio.

If you are not currently subscribed to

SIRIUS, No Subscription will be

displayed below Sat Radio followed by a

subscription screen, see page 209.

Audio

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

Welcome to Jaguar Touch Drive

External

Left Right

Sat Radio

Ch021 Octane

Rock

12 : 34 pm

JOL4458

71 70

F F

.5 .0

Valet

AM/FM

Sat Radio

CD Octane I-90 1053

Bridge Pulse Nation

Guns & Roses

Sat Options

SR1 CH022 Octane

Rock Hits Settings

Audio

12 : 34 pm

JOL4673

Satellite Radio

200

Satellite radio display panel

1. Category of music which is currently

selected.

2. Channel which is currently selected.

3. Seek up and seek down buttons.

4. Back - to previous screen or setting.

5. Programme description text (PDT)

description, which provides details

(where available) of the artist’s name,

song title and the composer and

subscription information.

6. PDT text display area - artist currently

playing.

7. Six preset memorised radio channels.

Press to select the required channel

e.g. Octane preset is selected in the

above example.

Preset memorised radio channels

Three screens are available, listed as

SR1, SR2 and SR3, each displayed on the

top line of the screen. Each screen can

display up to six preset channels, giving a

total of 18 possible preset channels.

Selecting Sat Radio repeatedly, cycles

through the three screens.

Preset memorised channel - setting

To save a channel as a preset, tune into

the channel that is to be stored, then

press and hold the desired preset button

for approximately two seconds. Audio

output is muted while the channel is being

stored and returns once the operation is

complete.

To change a preset, select the desired

channel either via Category lists, see

page 204 or manually, Direct channel

entry, see page 205. Then press and hold

the desired preset until the new channel is

stored.

Note: If manual tuning is used and a

channel is selected that is an existing

preset, the preset will highlight. If the

same channel is stored in more than one

preset (on different screens for example)

and manual tuning is performed, the first

preset will highlight.

If required, repeat the procedure to store

up to 17 other satellite channels.

AM/FM

Sat Radio

CD Octane I-90 1053

Bridge Pulse Nation

Guns & Roses

Sat Options

SR1 CH022 Octane

Rock Hits Settings

Audio

12 : 34 pm

JOL4512

AM/FM

Sat Radio

CD Octane Wax CNBC

Strobe The Pulse Disney

Guns & Roses

Sat Options

SR2 Ch101 Vista

Dance Settings

Audio

12 : 34 pm

JOL4461

SR2 SR3SR1

201

Satellite Radio

Recalling a preset channel

Select the appropriate source where the

desired channel is located (SR1, SR2 or

SR3) by pressing Sat Radio to cycle

through the list.

Select the desired preset button, e.g.

Octane. Audio output will switch to the

satellite channel stored on the selected

preset.

Seek Up and Seek Down

Short press: Either the seek down button

(1) or seek up button (2) to step to the next

numerical channel.

The channel which is displayed on release

of either button will be the channel that

satellite radio will tune to.

SONG SEEK

Song Seek can store up to 10 song titles

along with the artist’s name etc., if it is

transmitted with the PDT (Programme

Descriptive Text) information.

If, while listening to any satellite channel,

one of the stored Song Seek Favourites is

playing on any other satellite channel, the

user will be alerted visually. The user can

choose to tune to that channel.

The display indicates that the user is

currently listening to Ch042 (Channel 42

Hot Jamz on SR1).

The Song Seek pop-up (Song Seek

Interrupt) is giving the user the choice to

listen instead, to a Favourites (Guns &

Roses) which is currently playing on

Channel 021.

AM/FM

Sat Radio

CD Octane I-90 1053

Bridge Pulse Nation

Guns & Roses

Sat Options

SR1 CH022 Octane

Rock Hits Settings

Audio

12 : 34 pm

JOL4460

OctaneSR1

AM/FM

Sat Radio

CD Octane I-90 1053

Bridge Pulse Nation

Guns & Roses

Sat Options

SR1 CH022 Octane

Rock Hits Settings

Audio

12 : 34 pm

JOL4513

AM/FM

Sat Radio

Guns & Roses

SR1 Ch042 Hot Jamz

R&B/ Urban Settings

Audio

12 : 34 pm

JOL4493

Guns & Roses

The Rock.....

Switch to Channel 021?

SongSeek Interrupt

Yes

Satellite Radio

202

Activating song seek

To activate Song Seek, select Settings

and then select Song Seek.

When the feature is active, pressing the

PDT button on the Settings display

screen, will present the user with the

Satellite Information display pop-up

where the current favourite songs can be

viewed and edited.

When the feature is not active, the user

cannot add to or edit the favourite songs

list. However, the PDT information can

still be seen by selecting the PDT button.

Editing song seek favourites list

Note: Editing of the favourites list cannot

be carried out while the vehicle is in

motion.

To edit the list of songs in Song Seek,

select Edit Favourites on the SAT

Information pop-up.

If Song Seek is not active, then both Add

to Favourites and Edit Favourites will be

inoperative.

If Edit Favourites is selected, then the

following screen will be displayed.

Delete All is highlighted and if selected,

all songs in the Song Seek favourites list

will be deleted.

Should only one song at a time be

required to be deleted, select the

particular song on the list.

AM/FM

Sat Radio

CD Octane I-90 1053

Bridge Pulse Nation

Guns & Roses

Sat Options

SR1 CH022 Octane

Rock Hits Settings

Audio

12 : 34 pm

JOL4514

AM/FM

Sat Radio

Guns & Roses

SR1 Ch021 Octane

Rock Settings

Audio

12 : 34 pm

JOL4490

Guns & Roses

The Rock

SAT Information

Add to Favorites

Edit Favorites

SR1 Ch021 Octane

Audio

Pink Floyd Breathe

Beatles Revolver

Guns & Roses Paradise City

Beatles Eleanor Rigby

The Who My Generation

Delete All

12 : 34 pm

Delete

JOL4496

203

Satellite Radio

Select Delete to delete that song only.

Repeat the procedure for each song to be

deleted.

In all cases the user will be asked to

confirm that the song or songs should be

deleted.

Adding a song to the favourites list

To add a song to the Song Seek

favourites list, the following is necessary:

•The song should be currently playing.

•The user must select the PDT button;

a right-hand facing arrow situated at

the lower right hand side of the

screens.

The following screen will provide the

details of the song and give the user the

choice to add it to the favourites list.

If the user adds the song to the favourites

list, confirmation is as follows:

Favourites list is full

If the favourites list is full, the SAT

Information pop-up will indicate Entry

List is full. Delete Entry?

One or more songs must be deleted

before another song can be entered.

All songs may be deleted if desired.

To be able to put the Guns & Roses

example into the song seek favourites list,

first Edit Favourites in order to make

space.

SR1 Ch021 Octane

Audio

Delete All

12 : 34 pm

Delete

JOL4495

Pink Floyd Breathe

Beatles Revolver

Guns & Roses Paradise City

Beatles Eleanor Rigby

The Who My Generation

AM/FM

Sat Radio

Guns & Roses

SR1 Ch021 Octane

Rock Settings

Audio

12 : 34 pm

JOL4492

Guns & Roses

The Rock

SAT Information

Add to Favorites

Edit Favorites

AM/FM

Sat Radio

Guns & Roses

SR1 Ch040 Wax

Pop Settings

Audio

12 : 34 pm

JOL4491

Entry Added

SAT Information

AM/FM

Sat Radio

Guns & Roses

SR1 Ch101 Vista

Pop Settings

Audio

12 : 34 pm

JOL4494

Guns & Roses

The Rock

SAT Information

Add to Favorites

Edit Favorites

Entry List is full. Delete Entry

Satellite Radio

204

SAT OPTIONS MENU

The Sat Options button on the satellite

radio screen provides four other menu

features plus a SAT information screen.

Select Sat Options to view the available

options.

The options are:

•Category Lists.

•Direct Channel.

•Parental Lock.

•Channel Skip.

•SAT Information.

Category lists

The above screen shows that Category

Lists has already been selected and that

the Pop category has also been selected.

The following screen shows some of the

various channels that play music within

the Pop category.

Once a channel within the Pop Category

(or any other category) has been selected,

the radio will re-tune to that channel and

the display will return to the Sat Radio

Home screen, but with the new channel

information displayed.

The new channel is Ch040 Wax, whereas

the previous channel was Ch021 Octane.

Browse PDT

The Browse feature allows the user to

scan all available PDT (Programme

Descriptive Text) within a given category

without changing the current satellite

channel.

AM/FM

Sat Radio

CD Octane Wax CNBC

Strobe The Pulse ---

Culture Club

Sat Options

SR1 Ch021 Octane

Rock Settings

Audio

12 : 34 pm

JOL4466

SR1 Ch021 Octane

Audio

Category Lists

Direct Channel

Parental Lock

Channel Skip

SAT Information

Settings

All Channels

Pop

Rock

R&B / Urban

Dance

12 : 34 pm

JOL4467

AM/FM

Sat Radio

CD Octane Wax CNBC

Strobe The Pulse ---

Bill Withers - Lovely Day

Sat Options

SR1 Ch040 Wax

Pop Settings

Audio

12 : 34 pm

JOL4469

SR1 Ch021 Octane

Audio

040 Wax

041 Sirius Hits

042 Slow Jamz

043 The Express

044 The Vault

Browse PDT

12 : 34 pm

JOL4468

205

Satellite Radio

The Browse feature will update the PDT

information as programme information

changes within the SIRIUS broadcast.

This view can be maintained while

listening to the audio on the current

satellite channel. The user can scroll

across all available channels using the up

and down arrows to view broadcasted

PDT information. At any time a new

channel can be selected and the screen

will return to the normal satellite view.

Direct channel entry

This option allows the user to input the

channel number directly.

Select Sat Options on the satellite radio

Home screen.

Select Direct Channel on the Sat

Options screen, and a numerical keypad

will be displayed. The user is asked to

enter a channel number.

Channel number 105 has been entered.

A short press on the C (Clear) button will

delete one digit at a time.

Select OK when the desired channel

number has been entered correctly.

If an invalid channel number has been

entered, this will be displayed on the

screen.

If a valid channel has been entered, then

the following screen (Sat Radio Home

screen) will be displayed, but with the new

channel information.

Parental lock

This option allows the user to lock any

given channel or channels to prevent

them from being accessed.

The locked channels will be skipped when

navigating through the channels using the

seek up or seek down buttons.

SR1 Ch021 Octane

Audio

001

004

005

002

003

12 : 34 pm

JOL4470

Pink Floyd Breathe

Beatles Revolver

Guns & Roses Paradise City

Beatles Eleanor Rigby

The Who My Generation

Audio SR1 Ch021 Octane

Enter Channel Number

Category Lists C

Direct Channel

Parental Lock

Channel Skip

Sat Information

12 : 26 pm

78 9

JOL4473

Audio SR1 Ch021 Octane

105

Category Lists C

Direct Channel

Parental Lock

Channel Skip

Sat Information

12 : 26 pm

12 3

78 9

JOL4474

AM/FM

Sat Radio

CD Octane Wax CNBC

Strobe The Pulse ---

Todays Stock Report

Sat Options

SR1 Ch105 Bloomberg

News Settings

Audio

12 : 34 pm

JOL4475

Satellite Radio

206

To set-up, select Sat Options on the

satellite radio screen.

Note: Parental Lock cannot be performed

while the vehicle is in motion.

Select Parental Lock on the Sat Options

screen, and a numerical keypad will be

displayed. Enter a PIN number.

Number entry is identical to that for Direct

Channel Selection, except that there must

be four digits e.g. 125 must be entered as

0125 etc.

If the correct PIN is entered the following

screen is displayed which shows the

different Categories and All Channels.

Pop category has been selected.

After selecting Pop, the following screen

will be displayed:

Two channels are shown with the Lock

symbol.

There are three keys that the user can use

to lock or unlock channels.

The user can lock or unlock an individual

channel or lock them all within a

Category. To lock an individual channel,

just select the desired channel and select

Lock or Lock All depending on what is

displayed. The unlock procedure is the

same.

Edit Personal Identification Number

(PIN)

To edit the parental lock PIN, the user

must first enter the existing PIN.

If the system confirms that the entered

PIN is the correct one it will respond with

PIN Verified - Enter New PIN.

Enter the desired PIN (four digits).

This new PIN will then be stored and

over-write the previous one. A SAT

Information pop-up will indicate New PIN

Accepted.

Viewing a locked channel

When a locked channel is selected by

Channel Navigation, Direct Channel Entry

or Search by Category, it will not play and

will give the message Channel Locked

Enter PIN.

Audio SR1 Ch021 Octane

Enter PIN

Category Lists C

Direct Channel

Parental Lock

Channel Skip

Sat Information

12 : 26 pm

12 3

78 9

JOL4476

SR1 Ch021 Octane

Audio

All Channels

Pop

Rock

R&B / Urban

Dance

12 : 34 pm

JOL4477

SR1 Ch021 Octane

Audio

040 Wax

041 Sirius Hits

042 Slow Jamz

043 The Express

044 The Vault

Lock All

12 : 34 pm

Edit PIN

Unlock All

JOL4478

207

Satellite Radio

Enter the PIN via the keypad which will

subsequently be displayed.

If the correct PIN is entered, the channel

will play. However, the channel will play

only for the current driving cycle and will

again be locked the next time that the

vehicle is started and used.

If the PIN that is entered is incorrect, the

message Entry Invalid - Please try again

will be displayed.

Lost PIN information

If the user loses or forgets the PIN, access

may still be gained and a new PIN

entered, as follows.

Select Sat Options on the satellite radio

screen, to display the Options screen:

•Select Parental Lock 1 on the Sat

Options screen, and hold for 10

seconds - then release.

•Select SAT Information 2 and hold

for 10 seconds - then release.

•After a time-out period, the system

will display User PIN Has Been

Reset.

The PIN will have been reset to the system

default of 1111.

Go to Edit PIN and enter a new number.

Channel Skip

Channel Skip can be used to hide

channels from being selected when using

the seek up and seek down buttons - the

channels are actually skipped, not

hidden.

Select Sat Options on the satellite radio

screen, to display the Options screen:

Select Channel Skip 1 on the Sat

Options screen and the Category List will

be displayed.

Select the Category in which to view the

channels e.g. Pop 2.

When Pop has been selected the

channels within that category will be

displayed.

Audio SR1 Ch021 Octane

Enter PIN

Category Lists C

Direct Channel

Parental Lock

Channel Skip

Sat Information

12 : 26 pm

12 3

78 9

JOL4674

Audio SR1 Ch172 Intimate

User PIN Has been Reset

AM/FM C

Sat Radio

12 3

78 9

JOL4668

12 : 26 pm

SR1 Ch021 Octane

Audio

Category Lists

Direct Channel

Parental Lock

Channel Skip

SAT Information

All Channels

Pop

Rock

R&B / Urban

Dance

12 : 34 pm

JOL4479

Satellite Radio

208

Individual channels within a category can

be Skipped by selecting a channel and

pressing Skip.

All channels within a category can be

Skipped by pressing Skip All or

unskipped by pressing Unskip All.

Hidden (skipped) channels are accessible

by Direct Channel Entry.

Note: If same channel is locked and

skipped, then when the channel is

unlocked it will become unskipped.

SAT Information

The SAT Information screen contains the

SIRIUS contact telephone number and

the satellite radio Identification Number.

Select Sat Options on the satellite radio

screen, to display the Options screen.

Select SAT Information on the Sat

Options screen. This information is

displayed automatically when the system

is asking the user to subscribe to SIRIUS.

SUBSCRIPTION TO SIRIUS

When Sat Radio has been selected, but a

subscription to the provider has not been

made, a message will appear, showing

the telephone number of the provider.

Also shown is the SIRIUS ID that

identifies the receiver unit and is linked to

the VIN of the vehicle.

To subscribe, call the number indicated

and quote the SIRIUS ID, this would

normally be done by your Jaguar Dealer.

If SIRIUS has not yet been subscribed to,

the system will tune to the preview

channel - currently number 184. This

channel is accessible for a limited period

only, for approximately 90 days after

purchase of the vehicle.

The ignition system must be ON and the

vehicle must be outdoors in plain view of

the sky whilst authorisation takes place.

This authorisation/activation can take up

to 15 minutes.

SR1 Ch021 Octane

Audio

040 Wax

041 Sirius Hits

042 Slow Jamz

043 The Express

044 The Vault

Skip All

12 : 34 pm

Unskip All

JOL4480

SR1 Ch021 Octane

Audio

Category Lists

Direct Channel

Parental Lock

Channel Skip

SAT Information

12 : 34 pm

Sirius Satellite Radio Inc.

For Subscription Information Call:

888 - 539 - SIRIUS

Your SIRIUS ID: 012345678910

JOL4481

AM/FM

Sat Radio

SR1 Ch021 Octane

Audio

Sirius Satellite Radio Inc.

For Subscription Information Call:

888 - 539 - SIRIUS

Your SIRIUS ID: 012345678910

12 : 34 pm

JOL4464

209

Satellite Radio

Unsubscribed radio channels

If a channel is selected for which there is

no valid subscription, Unsubscribed

Channel is displayed.

Either subscribe to this selected channel

or select an alternative channel that has

already been subscribed to.

At the bottom of the screen Call SIRIUS

to Subscribe is displayed. Select the

right arrow button to display the

Subscription Details Pop-up screen.

Automatic updates of channels

Occasionally the system will be updated

automatically by SIRIUS.

Whilst updating, the audio will be muted.

When updating has been completed the

update screen details cancel.

After the automatic update procedure, the

following should be noted:

1. All locked channels will be unlocked.

2. All skipped channels will be

unskipped.

Signal acquiring

If the satellite signal is lost, or not found,

Acquiring will be shown on the display.

If the signal is not regained within a few

seconds, all of the relevant soft buttons

will inhibited. The dotted line after

Acquiring will flash until the channel is

regained.

When the signal has been regained, the

selected channel will again play.

Note: This is NOT the same as No

Subscription. The system is only

informing the driver that it cannot find the

signal, perhaps because of very tall

buildings or the vehicle is in a long tunnel.

AM/FM

Sat Radio

CD Octane Wax CNBC

Strobe The Pulse ---

Call SIRIUS to Subscribe

Sat Options

SR1 Ch150 Disney

Unsubscribed Channel Settings

Audio

12 : 34 pm

JOL4465

AM/FM

Sat Radio

Audio

Sirius Update

Please Wait

60%

12 : 34 pm

JOL4483

AM/FM

Sat Radio

CD Octane Wax CNBC

The Pulse

---

Sat Options

SR2 Acquiring........

Rock Settings

Audio

Spirit

12 : 34 pm

JOL4482

Telephone

210

Telephone

WHAT IS BLUETOOTH?

!WARNING:

•Using any hand-held appliance

while driving can be dangerous and

is illegal in certain countries.

•Always stop the vehicle before

making a call and ensure that the

telephone is switched off while you

are driving.

Bluetooth is an international standard that

allows electronic devices to communicate

with each other using a short-range radio

link. Bluetooth eliminates the need for

wires or cables. Typically, devices can

communicate at a range of up to 10

metres (33 feet).

The Bluetooth in-car telephone system

allows certain cell phones to be used

hands free in your vehicle. There is no

need to connect the cell phone to a cradle

or cable.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Note:

•

The vehicle ignition system must be

ON and the touch-screen system

must be active in order to use the

phone.

If your cellphone battery

charge becomes low it may

switch off its Bluetooth link

to the vehicle. This is normal for cell

telephones to help preserve remaining

battery charge. In this event, the

vehicle touch-screen will display a

Phone connection message.

Whilst in a phone call, the

phone uses its own antenna

to communicate to the

cellar network and therefore the

phone reception is controlled by the

cell telephone itself.

The vehicle’s Bluetooth telephone system

can be used with an appropriate,

Bluetooth-equipped cell phone.

Please refer to your Jaguar Dealer for a list

of compatible phones.

The cell phone must be paired and

docked with the vehicle system before

use, see SETTING UP YOUR PHONE on

page -211. Once paired and docked, the

phone can be operated via the steering

wheel switches, the cell phone or the

touch-screen.

The cell phone doesn’t need to be

physically connected to the vehicle, it can

be left in a jacket pocket, for instance.

Calls are routed through the vehicle’s

audio speakers, and a dedicated

microphone is fitted behind the A post

trim on the drivers side.

You can use the system to answer or

reject incoming calls, make outgoing calls

or alter the call volume. The system does

not support SMS text messaging.

Call volume

The volume of the telephone call can be

adjusted for hands-free operation. To

adjust the volume, operate the audio

system’s volume control during a phone

call, see page 184.

If the audio system is in use when the

phone becomes active, the audio system

source is suppressed for the duration of

the call.

211

Telephone

The Jaguar telephone system is designed

to function with a variety of Bluetooth

equipped cell phones. The audio and

echo characteristics vary between

models of cell phones, as a result, it may

take a few seconds for the vehicle system

to adapt to provide optimal audio

performance.

In order to achieve the best possible

audio performance, it may be necessary

to reduce the system volume slightly

when using certain cell phones.

SETTING UP YOUR PHONE

Telephone pairing and docking

Before use, your cell phone must be

connected or paired and docked with the

vehicle’s Bluetooth system.

Note: Pairing is the process that uses a

secure communication channel to allow

two Bluetooth devices to recognise each

other e.g. the vehicle and the cell phone.

Docking means that a phone has been

paired, recognised, and now requires to

be connected to the vehicle

Follow these steps to pair/dock your

phone:

1. Switch on your cell phone’s Bluetooth

connection, using the phone’s menu.

Make sure that your cell phone is in

Bluetooth discoverable mode,

sometimes referred to as find me

mode. (See your phone’s manual for

more information.)

2. Switch the vehicle’s ignition system

ON, ensure that the touch-screen

system is active.

3. From the home menu screen select

Phone.

4. If this is the first time that a phone has

been paired to the vehicle select

Search new. The system will search

for all Bluetooth phones that are in

range. If a phone is already docked it

will be automatically undocked when

a search is initiated.

Nametags

Voice mail

Answer options

Phone

Phone options

Docked phone: None

Other options

Change phone

Undock

Search new

Home

Audio

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

Valet

71 70

F F

.5 .0

Radio

90.7 FM1

KALX

12 : 26 pm

JAG0326NAS

Phone

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Cancel

Bluetooth search

Please wait . .

Searching . . .

12 : 26 pm

JAG0328NAS

Telephone

212

Note: Ensure that the Timeout to

home screen is turned Off before

starting a search sequence, see page

126.

5. If a phone has previously been paired

to the vehicle select Phone then

Settings.

6. Select your phone from displayed list.

7. Once you have selected your phone a

pop-up window appears.

To pair and dock phone enter XXXX

on the handset, XXXX being a random

four digit code displayed on the touch

screen.

Enter this into your phone (see your

phone’s handbook for more

information).

8. Your phone is now paired and docked

ready for use, see Making a Call on

page -217, see Ending a Call on

page -217 and see Receiving a call

on page -218.

Note:

•

Once a cell phone has been paired

and docked with the vehicle, the

system will search for the last

connected phone each time the

ignition is switched ON. You do not

need to manually pair and dock the

phone with the vehicle every time you

switch the ignition ON.

•

If an incorrect code is entered, your

cell phone should prompt you to enter

the correct code.

•

When the vehicle's entertainment

system is active and the last

connected phone comes into range of

the vehicle, the system will attempt to

connect to it.

If a phone call is ongoing when the

phone is connected, the phone call

will be automatically transferred to the

vehicle's microphone and speakers.

Home

Audio

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

Valet

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

Phone

Options

71 70

F F

.5 .0

Radio

90.7 FM1

KALX

12 : 26 pm

JAG0327NAS

Phone

Vertu Ascent

Nokia 623

Pair & dock

Delete

Not

Paired

Phone

Cancel

To pair & dock phone

Enter (5616) on handset

12 : 26 pm

JAG0330NAS

213

Telephone

If you wish to avoid this occurring

ensure that Bluetooth is turned off at

the phone.

Pairing other phones

Up to five cell phones can be paired with

the vehicle in the same way, however only

one can be docked for use. For further

information, see SETTING UP YOUR

PHONE on page -211, see Changing or

deleting the phone on page -213.

Changing or deleting the phone

Only one phone can be docked to the

vehicle at any one time. To dock a

different paired phone to the vehicle,

follow these steps:

From the home menu screen select

Phone, then Settings then Change

phone.

1. Select Dock from the list of available

phones.

2. Selecting Delete permanently

removes the phone from the list. To

use the phone again you have to pair

and dock the phone to the vehicle,

see SETTING UP YOUR PHONE on

page -211.

Note: The phone does not need to be

present to be deleted from the list.

Home

Audio

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

Valet

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

Phone

Options

71 70

F F

.5 .0

Radio

90.7 FM1

KALX

12 : 26 pm

JAG0327NAS

Voice mail

Answer options

Phone

Phone options

Docked phone: Motorola Pho....

Other options

Change phone

Undock

Search new

Delete

Phone

Delete

Dock

Docked

Paired

Motorola Pho.....

Nokia 6230

Vertu Ascent

12 : 26 pm

JAG0331NAS

Telephone

214

SETTINGS MENUS

From the settings main menu selecting

Change phone or Search new, for

further information,see SETTING UP

YOUR PHONE on page -211 see Pairing

other phones on page -213 or see

Changing or deleting the phone on

page -213.

Voice mail

You can set up your voice mail to be

accessed via the touch-screen. The voice

mail (network service) option is an

answering service where callers who are

unable to reach you can leave you

messages.

Select Voice mail enter the number

provided by your service provider and

press OK. This number is stored in the

system and used to retrieve any voice

mail messages.

Retrieving voice mail

To listen to your voice mail messages

press and hold 1.

The voice mail features can be used as if

dialled from the cell phone.

Answer options

1. Select Answer options.

2. Auto answer.

If automatic answer is on the call will

automatically answer after a few

seconds.

Select Off or On.

Voice mail

Answer options

Phone

OKPhone options

12345...

Voice mail

Answer options

Phone

OKPhone options

12345678910

12 : 26 pm

JAG0333NAS

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

Phone

Options

12 : 26 pm

JAG0334NAS

Voice mail

Answer options

Phone

Phone options

Off On

Auto answer

12 : 26 pm

JAG0335NAS

215

Telephone

Phone options

1. Select Phone options 1.

2. Ringtones (Ringtone options).

3. Phonebook (Phonebook options).

Ringtones

Four ringtones are available (for in vehicle

ringing) or you can use your cell phone’s

own ring tone:

Select Ringtones 2, Select Portable’s

inband tone to use your cell phones

ringtone.

Note: Not all phones support inband

ringing.

Note: If the phone is set to silent or

vibrate, inband ringing may not be

available.

Or select Ringtone 1, 2, 3 or 4 to use a

Jaguar preset ringtone.

Note:

The system will store the ring tone setting

associated with each cell phone i.e. can

be set for each paired cell phone.

Phonebook

The phone book option 3, refer to the

illustration on the previous page, allows

you to automatically download your cell

phones directory, erase it from the

vehicle’s memory or refresh it.

The system can store a maximum of 750

entries although this figure varies,

depending on the type of cell phone used,

see Phonebook capacity on page -217.

Voice mail

Answer options

Phone

Phone options

Ringtones

Phonebook

12 : 26 pm

JAG0336NAS

Phone

Portable's inband tone

Ringtone 1

Ringtone 2

Ringtone 3

Ringtone 4

Phone

Portable's inband tone

Ringtone 1

Ringtone 2

Ringtone 3

Ringtone 4

12 : 26 pm

JAG0337NAS

Telephone

216

Note: It may take several minutes to copy

the phone book to the vehicle, depending

on the phone and number of entries

stored. The telephone system may not be

operational during this period.

Auto download

Any phone numbers stored in your cell

phone book can be copied to the

vehicle’s phone system.

If auto download is ON, the cell phone

phonebook will be transferred to the

vehicle every time the phone is connected

(docked).

This feature will only work on phones that

support AT Phonebook Profile, refer to

your phone’s handbook.

To change auto download: Select Phone

options 1. Press Phonebook 3, see

Phone options.

Select Off or On.

Erase entire phonebook

To erase the entire phone book directory:

Select Phone options 1, see page see

Phone options on page -215. Press

Phonebook 3.

Select Erase entire phonebook.

A pop-up window alerts you, that you are

about to Erase entire phonebook. Select

OK to remove all names from the vehicle

directory.

To delete one or more names but not all,

see Names on page -218.

Note:

This feature deletes phonebook entries

stored in the vehicle memory and not

those stored in the cell phone memory.

Voice mail

Answer options

Phone

Phone options

12 : 26 pm

Erase entire phonebook

Off On

Auto

Download

JAG0550NAS

Voice mail

Answer options

Phone

Phone options

12 : 26 pm

Erase entire phonebook

Off On

Auto

Download

JAG0551NAS

Voice mail

Answer options

Phone

Phone options

12 : 26 pm

Start manual download

Erase entire phonebook

Off On

Auto

Download

Phone

Cancel

Erase entire phonebook

JAG0552NAS

217

Telephone

Phonebook capacity

Certain cell phones store the phone book

in two different areas, the SIM card and

the phone memory. Where possible the

vehicle will display both SIM card and

phone memory entries up to a maximum

of 750 entries. With some cell phones, the

number of entries from one or both of

these area may be restricted, it is not

always possible to transfer addresses

stored in one or both of these areas.

The number of entries displayed is

dependant upon the number of SIM and

phone memory entries support by the cell

phone.

Note: Certain cell phones do not allow

phone book entries stored on the SIM

card to be transferred via Bluetooth.

However, it may be possible to transfer

the SIM phone book to the cell phone’s

memory, before copying it to the vehicle

phone book. Refer to your cell phone

manual for more information. It is

advisable to remove duplicate and blank

entries from the cell phone before the

phone book is downloaded.

USING YOUR PHONE

Making a Call

Before you make a call, your cell phone

must be connected or paired and docked

with the vehicle’s Bluetooth system, see

SETTING UP YOUR PHONE on

page -211

From the Home menu screen select

Phone.

Key in the phone number, including the

area code, if applicable. The number will

be displayed, press the connect icon.

Changing a phone number

When dialling a number, you can change

the phone number shown on the touch

screen display using the C button.

A momentary press erases any single

digit, a long press erases the complete

number.

Ending a Call

The preferred method to end a call is to

use the hands-free controls on the

steering wheel, see page 220.

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

Phone

Options

01926648100

Home

Audio

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

Valet

71 70

F F

.5 .0

Radio

90.7 FM1

KALX

12 : 26 pm

JAG0342NAS

Telephone

218

Alternatively, to end a call press end call

icon.

Receiving a call

If the audio system is in use when the

phone becomes active, the audio system

source is suppressed for the duration of

the call.

If automatic answer has been

programmed the call will automatically

answer after a few seconds, see Answer

options on page -214.

To answer

The preferred method to accept an

incoming call, if auto answer is not

active, is to use the hands-free controls

on the steering wheel, see page 220.

Alternatively, you can accept or reject the

incoming call from the pop-up displayed

on the touch-screen.

In-call options

When in a telephone call, Options may be

selected to Microphone mute or

Privacy.

Microphone mute: This will mute your

telephone microphone so that the

receiver of the call cannot hear you.

Privacy: Allows the use of the cell phone

itself and only sends the audio to the cell

phone speaker not the vehicle speakers.

Note: Some phones will switch off the

Bluetooth link to the vehicle when in

Privacy mode.

Ending a received call

To end the call, see Ending a Call on

page -217 above.

Names

Directory name search and Deleting

names

From the Home menu screen select

Phone.

Select Names.

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

Phone

Options

01926648100

00:03:24

12 : 26 pm

JAG0343NAS

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

Phone

PQRS

GHI

TUV

ABC

JKL

WXYZ

DEF

MNO

Search letter

Home

Audio

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

Valet

71 70

F F

.5 .0

Radio

90.7 FM1

KALX

12 : 26 pm

JAG0344NAS

219

Telephone

1. Using the keyboard select the first

letter of the contact name.

If name begins with the second or

third letter on the button, press the

button two or three time respectively.

For example, if the name required was

Oliver, the MNO button should be

pressed three times.

2. Select OK.

3. Select the desired name to make a

call. Or select Delete to remove the

name from the directory.

Last 10 option

The Last 10 option allows you to view the

last 10 calls made, received or missed.

From the home menu screen select

Phone.

1. Select Last 10.

2. Select Calls made.

3. Select Calls received or

4. Select Calls missed.

The search fields are opened and a list of

calls made, received or missed are listed,

with the most recent at the top.

To make or return a call select the name

from the list, your call will be routed

automatically.

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

Phone

Comms

PQRS

GHI

TUV

ABC

JKL

WXYZ

DEF

MNO

Options

Search letter

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

Phone

Comms

PQRS

GHI

TUV

ABC

JKL

WXYZ

DEF

MNO

Options

Delete

Phone

Delete

Mark Home

Mark Work

Melissa

Mike Home

Mia Mobile

12 : 26 pm

JAG0345NAS

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

Phone

Comms

Calls missed

Calls made

Calls received

12 : 26 pm

JAG0346NAS

Phone

Mark Work

01926648100

Kate

Kieran Home

Erin Mobile

12 : 26 pm

JAG0347NAS

Telephone

220

Note:

The vehicle will display the list in the order

that they are sent from the cell phone.

Some phones may arrange the list in

reverse or other order.

STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS

Four system adjustment controls are

situated on the left-hand side of the

steering wheel, duplicating functions of

buttons on the touch screen. The

preferred method of use is by these

buttons to minimise driver distraction.

1. Scroll up/down to increase or

decrease volume.

2. Scroll up/down to next/previous

memory location.

3. SOURCE.

4. Press and hold to access phone

mode.

Momentarily press and release to exit

phone mode.

Making/Ending a call

To dial:

Key in the phone number, including the

area code. The number will be displayed.

To connect press:

on the steering wheel or

on the touch screen.

To end the call press:

on the steering wheel or

on the touch screen.

Continuity of calls

Whilst in a call, the call remains

connected if the vehicle is in

convenience mode. When the call ends,

another call cannot be made or received

through the vehicle system unless the

ignition system is ON and the

touch-screen system active

(START/STOP button pressed).

JAG0348G

1 2

4 3

221

Telephone

Other features

Do not disturb mode

If you do not wish to be

disturbed by incoming phone

calls press the bell icon 1 on the

touch screen. A visual representation will

be displayed on the touch screen to

advise the driver that Do not disturb mode

is selected 3 and Do not disturb mode

will be visible when in telephone mode (2).

Any incoming calls will be rejected or

diverted to voice mail, see 214.

Keyboard zoom

This option allows the user to increase the

keyboard size.

When making a call using your numerical

key pad displayed on the touch screen,

the zoom icon becomes selectable.

Select the zoom icon to enlarge the

keypad size.

Select the zoom icon again to reduce the

size.

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

Phone

Options

Do not disturb mode

12 : 26 pm

JAG0352NAS

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

Phone

Options

DigiDial

Names

Last 10

Phone

Comms

789

Options

12 : 26 pm

JAG0353NAS

DigiDial

Names

Last 10

Phone

Comms

789

Options

12 : 26 pm

JAG0354NAS

Emergency Equipment

222

Chapter 7

FIRE EXTINGUISHER

!WARNING:

Do not use a fire extinguisher closer

than 2.4 m (8 feet) to the base of a liquid

fire as the force may splatter the

burning liquid to the surrounding area.

Dealer Fitted Fire Extinguisher

Your Jaguar Dealer can supply and fit

one.

Factory Fitted Fire Extinguisher

Mexican vehicles have a factory fitted fire

extinguisher which contains 1.0 kg (2.2 lb)

of BC powder pressurised with nitrogen

to a working pressure of 12 bar (180 psi)

at 20°C (68°F).

This extinguisher can be used on liquid

fires, electrical equipment fires and, if no

explosion risk, gasoline fires.

To operate the fire extinguisher, follow the

instructions as stated on the extinguisher.

Do not test the fire extinguisher prior to

use. Partial discharge will render the

extinguisher inoperative.

Maintenance

Every six months:

•Remove the extinguisher from its

bracket and check that the nozzle is

clear.

•Check that any fitted safety devices

are secure.

•If fitted, check pressure gauge is

reading within limits. If the gauge is

indicating incorrect limits, the

extinguisher may not work in an

emergency. Seek qualified assistance

immediately.

WARNING TRIANGLE

A warning triangle, designed to

international standards, is standard

equipment in certain countries.

Coupe: The warning triangle is stowed

under the luggage compartment load

floor.

Convertible: The warning triangle is

stowed in the luggage compartment lid.

Mexico only: The two warning triangles

are stored in a bag stowed in the luggage

compartment.

In an emergency, remove the triangle(s)

and unfold its stand legs. Place the

triangle(s) in the road in accordance with

local traffic regulations to give oncoming

traffic warning of an immobilised vehicle.

Hazard warning lights must be used with

the warning triangle.

FIRST AID KIT

Your Jaguar Dealer has first aid kits

available.

223

Status After a Collision

Status Afte r a Collis ion

DRIVING AFTER A COLLISION

If the vehicle is involved in a collision, the

functionality of the vehicle could be

reduced.

Depending upon the severity of the

collision the following vehicle functions

may come into effect:

•engine shut down

•inertia switch tripped, which cuts off

the fuel pumps

•doors unlock

•hazard and interior lights come on (the

hazard lights will remain on until the

inertia switch is reset)

•the message centre will display

INERTIA SWITCH TRIPPED

•exterior lights will maintain their state.

ATTEMPTING TO START THE

VEHICLE

!WARNING:

To reduce the risk of fire or personal

injury, do not under any

circumstances, attempt to start the

vehicle if you see or smell fuel.

The inertia switch may have been tripped

by the collision. This will cut off the fuel

pumps. The switch must be reset before

the engine will start.

Resetting the switch

If no fuel leak is apparent:

1. Press the engine START/STOP

button, without pressing the brake

pedal, to turn the ignition back to

convenience mode (ignition OFF).

Wait for approximately 10 seconds.

2. Press the engine START/STOP button

again, without pressing the brake

pedal, to turn the ignition ON. Wait 30

seconds.

3. Make a further check for fuel leaks.

4. Press the START/STOP button with

the brake pedal depressed to start the

engine as normal.

MOVING THE VEHICLE

If the engine starts, the vehicle may be

moved carefully to a position of safety. Do

not move the vehicle further than

necessary.

Recovery

Even if the vehicle appears driveable after

the collision, it should not be driven or

towed. Concealed damage could make

the vehicle impossible to manoeuvre. See

page 224.

Vehicle Recovery

224

Vehicle Recovery

TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

Jaguar strongly recommend that the

vehicle is recovered by use of a slide-bed

recovery transporter only.

Caution:

•Ensure that the recovery team do

not tow with sling-type,

spectacle-type or towing dolly

equipment as damage to the front

or rear underside bodywork may

result.

•If the vehicle has an inoperable

transmission, to prevent further

damage, it must be towed with the

rear wheels clear of the ground.

Transporting

If the vehicle is being transported the

parkbrake must be applied, the wheels

chocked and the gear selector lever

moved to position N or D but never to P.

While the vehicle is being loaded, the

Jaguar Smart Key should be placed in the

starter control unit. This will prevent the

steering lock activating.

The vehicle must be securely tied down to

the transporter or trailer. Use straps on

the front wheels and tires to secure the

vehicle for transportation.

The towing eye is not designed for

securing the vehicle during

transportation.

JAG0355G

225

Vehicle Recovery

Vehicle failure

!WARNING:

Without the engine running, the brake

servo and power steering pump cannot

provide assistance: greater effort will

therefore be required to operate the

brake pedal and turn the steering

wheel. Longer stopping distances will

also be experienced.

The removable towing eye is primarily for

emergency use when towing for short

distances, e.g. removing the vehicle if it is

causing an obstruction or for winching the

vehicle onto a recovery transporter. To

prevent damage while the vehicle is being

towed with the rear wheels on the ground,

towing distance must be restricted to

0.8 kilometres (0.5 miles). Towing speed

must not exceed 48 km/h (30 mph).

When being towed, the transmission must

be in neutral (N) with the ignition system

switched to convenience mode to

release the steering lock and render the

indicators, horn and brake lights

operational.

Vehicle Recovery

226

TOWING POINTS

!WARNING:

Avoid body contact with a hot exhaust

pipe when fitting any equipment to the

rear towing points.

Caution:

•The towing eye is not suitable for

solid bar towing.

•Care must be taken to avoid

damaging the bumpers and front

apron.

A screw-in front towing eye is provided in

the luggage compartment with the jack.

The towing eye has a left-hand thread and

must be screwed in a counter-clockwise

direction when fitting.

The front towing point is located behind a

plastic cover on the left-hand side of the

vehicle (as viewed from the front).

1. To access the towing point, press the

plastic cover on the top to unclip.

Remove the cover.

2. Screw the towing eye into the vehicle,

right up to the shoulder.

3. The rear tie-down point is in the centre

of the vehicle to the rear of the

exhaust silencer.

Use this point only when the vehicle is

to be towed rearwards on straight

level ground for the least amount of

distance possible or loading onto a

recovery vehicle.

JAG0356G

227

Vehicle Care

Chapter 8

!WARNING:

Many liquids and other substances

used in vehicles are poisonous and

should never be consumed and must

be kept away from open wounds.

These substances include antifreeze,

brake fluid, fuel, windshield washer

additives, lubricants and various

adhesives.

Caution: Read individual product

warnings before using any car cleaning

or washing products.

CLEANING PRODUCTS

!WARNING:

Dry cleaning fluids may be toxic or

flammable. Take adequate precautions

when handling these products.

Brush and clean the interior regularly. Use

a vacuum cleaner where possible to

remove all dust from the interior and trim.

CLEANING THE EXTERIOR

Washing your vehicle

For best results, do not wash the vehicle

under strong sunlight. Always allow the

vehicle to cool down before washing.

Do not use a dry cloth to wipe dirty

paintwork. Dust and gritty substances are

abrasive and will scratch the paintwork.

Remove dirt using a cellulose sponge and

plenty of warm (never hot) water. Rinse off

with clean water and dry using a clean,

damp chamois leather.

Do not use household soaps or

detergents. The use of Jaguar Vehicle

Shampoo is recommended.

Using an automatic wash

Caution:

•Ensure that AUTO, wipers, is not

selected when entering a car wash

or damage to the wiper blades and

arms can occur as they will operate

in the car wash.

•Ensure that the audio system is

turned OFF so that the aerial is

retracted.

Note: Regular use of automatic car

washes tends to dull the lustre of the

paintwork.

After leaving the car wash, switch on the

windshield wiper immediately to remove

water and prevent a build up of wax.

Convertible top fabric

Caution:

•Do not use an automatic car wash

that has rotating brushes.

The action of the brushes may

damage the exterior fabric or the

seals of the convertible top.

•Do not use spot cleaners, chemical

dilutants or any organic cleaners. If

in doubt, contact your Jaguar

Dealer.

JAG0437G

Vehicle Care

228

To maintain the appearance and

condition of the convertible top, the

recommendations given below should be

followed. This is of particular importance

in the case of light coloured tops.

Do not leave the top in the open (folded)

position for longer than is necessary, as in

certain circumstances permanent soiling

along the folds may occur.

Cleaning: Every 1 600 km (1 000 miles)

vacuum clean and wash the convertible

top using the Jaguar Soft Top Cleaning

Kit, carefully following the instructions

enclosed.

Reproofing: Every 8 000 km (5 000 miles)

reproof the top using the solution in the

cleaning kit, carefully following the

instructions enclosed.

Preparation for Winter

Before the onset of Winter, it is advisable

to coat the convertible top seals and

respective body seals with a compound,

such as Carbaflo KSP 105, to aid

operation in freezing conditions.

This action will need to be repeated at the

start of each Winter to maintain

protection.

Care must be taken so that the compound

does not come into contact with the

convertible top material. For further

advise you should contact your Jaguar

Dealer.

Aerial care

Regular cleaning with a special aerial

cleaner, will ensure smooth and reliable

operation of the aerial.

In freezing conditions check that no ice

has formed over the top of the aerial,

which could prevent it being raised and

cause damage to the motor.

The Jaguar Aerial Cleaning Kit contains

the necessary maintenance items.

Using a high pressure washer

Caution: Some high pressure cleaning

systems are sufficiently powerful to

penetrate door and window seals and

damage rubbing strips and locking

mechanisms. Never aim the water jet

directly at heater air intakes, body

seals, the convertible top, or at any

componant that might easily be

damaged.

When salt is used on the roads, wash the

vehicle immediately after encountering

such conditions. Clean undersides and

wheel arches using a high pressure jet.

Underhood cleaning

Caution: Do not use a high pressure

washer or steam cleaner in the engine

compartment. Damage to components

could occur.

Glass surfaces

Clean the rear window with a soft cloth to

avoid damaging the heating element. DO

NOT scrape the glass or use any abrasive

cleaning fluid.

Mirror glass is particularly susceptible to

damage. Wash with soapy water. DO

NOT use abrasive cleaning compounds or

metal scrapers to remove ice.

The following products will ensure glass

surfaces and windshield wipers are kept

in good condition:

Jaguar Screen Clean Paste – Apply to the

exterior of the windshield only to ensure

effective operation of the windshield

wiper.

Jaguar Glass Cleaner – Interior and

exterior of all other glass surfaces.

229

Vehicle Care

Jaguar Screen Wash – Washer reservoir

additive.

Jaguar Winter Care Kit comprising

de-icer, ice scraper, anti-mist wipe cloth

and aerial cleaner – for use in adverse

weather conditions.

Cleaning the rear screen

To avoid damaging the heating elements,

when cleaning the inside of the rear

screen use only a soft damp cloth or

chamois leather. Do not use solvents or

sharp objects to clean the glass.

Care of alloy road wheels

The alloy road wheels are covered with a

protective anti-corrosion coating. To

prevent corrosion it is essential that this

coating is not damaged.

When removing or fitting tires always

advise the tire fitter to treat the alloy

wheels with great care. Tire levers must

not be used.

Wash the wheels regularly with soap and

water to avoid an accumulation of

particles. In salty conditions the wheels

should be cleaned more frequently.

Jaguar acid-free wheel cleaner can be

used to remove heavy soiling. Do not use

non-approved acid based cleaners.

Removing Grease and Tar

Remove grease or tar with Jaguar Tar

Remover or methylated spirit (alcohol).

White spirit is also effective, but must not

be applied to rubber, particularly the

windshield wiper blades.

Bird Droppings

Do not allow bird droppings or tree sap to

harden. Remove from paintwork

immediately with a lukewarm soap and

water solution.

Polishing

For maximum protection against road

dust, salts, industrial fall-out etc., it is

recommended that the vehicle is polished

regularly using Jaguar polish and a

polishing cloth.

Note: The vehicle’s brightwork should be

cleaned in the same way as the paintwork:

Chrome polish or other abrasive cleaners

must not be used.

CLEANING THE INTERIOR

Caution: To prevent airbag damage,

the steering wheel centre pad and

other areas containing airbags should

only be cleaned sparingly with a damp

cloth, warm water and a non-detergent

soap. Do not allow these areas to be

flooded with chemical solvents, liquids,

furniture cream or polishes.

Leather

Leather is an easy to maintain natural

product, however, dust and substances

can penetrate the pores and crease the

leather, causing surface wear and

brittleness.

To prevent ingrained dirt and staining,

inspect the seat upholstery regularly and

clean every one to two months as follows:

•Wipe off fine dust from the seat

surfaces using a clean, damp,

non-coloured cloth. Change

frequently to a clean area of cloth to

avoid abrasive action on the leather

surface. Avoid over-wetting.

•If this is not sufficient, use a cloth

which has been dampened with warm

soapy water and then wrung out. Use

only mild non-caustic soap.

Vehicle Care

230

•Use Jaguar Leather Cleaner for

heavily soiled areas. Dry off and rub

with a clean soft cloth, changing

surfaces regularly.

When staining (e.g. from clothing) or

spillage occurs, clean the affected area

immediately as described above.

Use Jaguar Leather Cleaner several times

a year to maintain its appearance and

suppleness. The cleaner will nourish and

moisturise and help to improve the

surface protective film against dust and

substances.

•Do not use solvents. Do not use

detergents, furniture polish or

household cleaners. While these

products may initially give impressive

results, their use will lead to rapid

deterioration of the leather and will

invalidate the warranty. Jaguar

recommend a basic set of products

that have been specially selected for

the type of leather in your vehicle.

•Dark clothing may stain leather seats

just like other upholstery products.

•Sharp objects such as belts, zip

fasteners, rivets, etc. can leave

permanent scratches and scratch

marks on the leather surface.

•Unless spillages such as tea, coffee or

ink are washed away immediately,

permanent staining may have to be

accepted.

If a valet service is used, ensure that the

specialist concerned is aware of, and

follows these instructions precisely.

Cloth and fabric

Caution:

•Never use soap, ammonia, bleach

or other cleaners intended for use

on hard surfaces.

•Do not use upholstery cleaner on

electrical equipment such as facia

switches.

•When cleaning around electrical

equipment such as switches,

ensure that fluids do not leak into

any gaps around the components

or between panels or trim.

Use Jaguar Upholstery Cleaner, following

the instructions. Do not over wet.

Removing stains

Most stains on woollen fabric can be

removed if treatment is carried out

immediately, before the stain has a

chance to dry-in.

Most stains can be treated with one of

three cleaning fluids: Jaguar Upholstery

Cleaner, dry cleaning fluid or clean water.

Follow the instructions on the package.

Carpet and mats

Marks or stains can be removed by gentle

scrubbing with a weak solution of soap

and warm water.

For more stubborn stains a commercially

available carpet cleaner should be used.

231

Vehicle Care

Floor mat retention

The driver’s floor mat must be correctly

positioned and secured under the

tongues on the retention posts (only one

post shown). Ensure that the mat does

not interfere with the operation of the

accelerator or brake pedal.

REPAIRING MINOR PAINT

DAMAGE

Paint chips

Scratches and chips should be touched in

before weathering action begins. Inspect

the paintwork immediately after the

vehicle has been washed.

JAG0357L

Maintenance

232

Maintenance

GENERAL INFORMATION

Protect the environment

We must all play our part in protecting the

environment. Correct vehicle usage and

disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication

materials are significant steps towards

this aim.

Avoid using high engine speeds. This will

protect your engine, reduce fuel

consumption, lower the engine noise level

and help towards reducing the

environmental burden.

Dispose of used parts and fluids at your

local authorised waste disposal facilities.

Regular Servicing

Caution: Severe damage to the

electrical system and electronic

components can occur if any attempt

is made to diagnose faults in the

electrical system using conventional

diagnostic equipment (for example, the

use of test lamps or low impedance

voltmeters). The fitting of any electrical

accessory should only be entrusted to

a Jaguar Dealer.

Regular maintenance and servicing is the

responsibility of the owner. Failure to

implement maintenance at the

recommended intervals could result in

deterioration of vehicle performance and

possible infringement of regulations.

Your Jaguar Dealer will be pleased to

arrange periodic servicing in accordance

with the Passport to Service (USA and

Canada) or Service Portfolio (Mexico).

Warranty - USA and Canada

The Passport to Service contains

warranties applicable to the vehicle,

which include:

•The Limited Vehicle Warranty.

•The Emission Control System

Warranty and covered parts list.

•The Corrosion Warranty.

Tires are not warranted by Jaguar Cars

Limited, but by the specific manufacturer

of the tires on the vehicle. Details of tire

warranties are included in the vehicle

literature pack.

Warranty - Mexico

The Warranty Benefits booklet contains

warranties applicable to the vehicle,

which include:

•The Limited Vehicle Warranty.

•The Emission Control System

Warranty and covered parts list.

•The Corrosion Warranty.

Owner maintenance

In addition to the routine services and

inspections, a number of simple checke

must be carried out more frequently. You

can carry out these checks yourself.

Any significant or sudden drop in fluid

levels, or uneven tyre wear, should be

reported to a Jaguar Dealer/Authorised

Repairer without delay.

Daily checks

•Operation of lamps, horn, direction

indicators, wipers, washers and

warning indicators.

•Operation of seat belts and brakes.

233

Maintenance

•Look for fluid deposits underneath the

vehicle that might indicate a leak.

Condensation drips from air

conditioning is normal.

Weekly checks

•Engine oil level.

Note: The engine oil level should be

checked more frequently if the vehicle

is driven for prolonged periods at high

speeds.

•Brake fluid level.

•Power steering fluid level.

•Screen washer fluid level.

•Tyre pressures and condition.

•Operate air conditioning.

Monthly

Wiper blades - Check the quality of the

wipe. If smearing or juddering is evident,

clean the windshield and renew the wiper

blades.

Maintenance

234

OPENING AND CLOSING THE

HOOD

!WARNING:

When working within the engine

compartment, take care to avoid

contact with moving parts and hot

components.

The hood lock release control is below the

facia on the left-hand side of the vehicle.

To open: Release the hood lock by

pulling the lever. Reach across to the

centre rear edge of the hood and lift. The

gas filled struts will assist raising the

hood, and retain it in the fully open

position.

!WARNING:

Before closing the hood ensure that no

one is obstructing the closing area and

that hands and clothes are clear.

Caution: Do not press downward on

the top of the hood to close it,

especially within the final centimetres

(inches) of closing, as this may damage

the hood.

Hood latching: Close the hood to within

a distance of 30 cm to 35 cm

(12 to 14 inches) of the fully closed

position, then let go to allow the hood to

shut.

To check that the hood is closed, pull the

hood upwards to ensure that both the

right-hand and left-hand latches are

engaged.

JAG0359G

235

Maintenance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OVERVIEW

Normally aspirated engine

1. Coolant reservoir.

2. Windshield and headlamp washer

reservoir.

3. Engine oil filler.

4. Brake reservoir.

5. Engine oil dipstick.

6. Power steering reservoir.

JAG0363N

1 2

Maintenance

236

Supercharged engine

1. Coolant reservoir.

2. Windshield and headlamp washer

reservoir.

3. Engine oil filler.

4. Brake reservoir.

5. Engine oil dipstick.

6. Power steering reservoir.

JAG0559N

1 2

237

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL CHECK

Caution:

•If the message ENGINE OIL

PRESSURE LOW is displayed, stop

the engine immediately and seek

qualified assistance. Do not start

the engine until the cause has been

identified and rectified.

•Your vehicle’s warranty may be

invalidated if damage is caused by

the use of improper engine oil. Low

quality or obsolete oils do not

provide the protection required by

modern, high performance engines.

Failure to use an oil that meets the

required specification could cause

excessive engine wear, a build up

of sludge and deposits and

increased pollution. It could also

lead to engine failure.

•Do not use oil additives of any type

as engine damage could occur. Use

only specified lubricants.

Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of oil consumption is

normal. The rate of consumption will

depend on the following:

•the quality and viscosity of the oil

•climatic conditions

•the speed at which the engine is being

operated

•road conditions.

Drivers should expect above normal

consumption when the engine is new.

Check the oil level regularly with the

vehicle on flat, level ground.

Check the oil level with the engine

completely cold.

To check engine oil level

Remove the dipstick 1 and wipe clean

with a lint free cloth. Replace fully, then

withdraw the dipstick. If the oil level is

above the lower of the two dots on the

dipstick then no additional oil is required.

If the oil level is at or below the lower of

the two dots, remove the oil filler cap 2

and add oil, to the quantity and

specification shown on page 238.

Refit the filler cap and hand tighten

securely until one click is heard.

JAG0364G

Maintenance

238

Recommended engine oil

Jaguar recommends

When the oil level is at the lower dipstick

mark, add 1litres (1.1 US quart) of oil.

Oil specification

API SM and ILSAC GF-4.

When topping up between

oil changes, make sure that

you use oil that has the

correct quality level (API

service) and viscosity grade.

Note: For maximum fuel economy, 5W-30

oil is recommended.

Engine oil temperature ranges

For climates ranging from -35°C (– 31°F)

to + 50°C (+ 122°F), the following oil

viscosities may be used:

0W–30 will protect from -35°C (– 31°F) to

+ 35°C (+ 95°F).

5W–30 (preferred) will protect from -30°C

(–22°F) to +35°C (+95°F).

0W–40 will protect from – 35°C (– 31°F) to

+ 50°C (+ 122°F).

5W–40 will protect from –30°C (–22°F) to

+50°C (+122°F).

ENGINE COOLANT CHECK

!WARNING:

•It is unsafe to run the engine in an

overheated condition.

•The radiator cooling fans may

continue to run after the ignition

has been switched off but will

automatically switch off when the

engine has cooled sufficiently.

•Do not remove the coolant

reservoir filler cap while the engine

is hot. If it is essential, then protect

your hands against escaping

steam. Slowly turn the cap counter

clockwise to allow the steam

pressure to escape completely

before removing the cap.

Caution: If persistent coolant loss is

noticed, seek qualified assistance

immediately.

Check the level only when the engine is

cold. The coolant level should be between

the MAX and MIN indicators. If persistent

coolant loss is noticed, seek qualified

assistance immediately.

JAG0365G

239

Maintenance

If the message centre displays the

message ENGINE OVERHEATING, pull

over and allow the engine to idle for five

minutes and then switch off for ten

minutes. Switch on and provided that the

warning does not recur, continue your

journey avoiding harsh acceleration. Seek

qualified assistance as soon as possible.

Topping up

!WARNING:

•Do not allow antifreeze to make

contact with skin or eyes. If this

should happen, rinse the affected

area immediately with plenty of

water.

•Coolant fluid is toxic and in

concentrated form is flammable.

Observe all warnings indicated on

the container.

Caution: Antifreeze will damage

paintwork. Wash off immediately if

spillage occurs.

Top up with a mixture of 50% water and

50% antifreeze until the coolant is

between the MAX and MIN. This 50/50%

mixture gives frost protection for

temperatures down

to – 40°C (– 40°F). Use antifreeze to

specification WSS M97B44, coloured

orange, Extended Life Coolant.

Refit the filler cap and hand-tighten

securely until one click is heard.

WASHER FLUID CHECK

!WARNING:

•Windshield washer fluid is toxic and

in concentrated form is flammable.

Observe all warnings on the washer

solution container.

•Under no circumstances must

cooling system antifreeze be used,

since this will damage the

paintwork.

The washer reservoir contains the fluid for

the windshield washers and the headlamp

powerwash system.

Fill with Jaguar Windshield Washer Fluid

diluted with clean soft water as specified

in the instructions on the bottle. Do not

over fill.

Using a non-approved fluid may

adversely affect the wiper blade rubber,

resulting in ineffectual and noisy wiping.

JAG0366G

Maintenance

240

Cold weather precautions

To prevent damage to the pump during

freezing conditions, use Jaguar

Windshield Washer Fluid at the strength

shown on the bottle, for the anticipated

ambient temperature.

Caution: State or local regulations on

volatile organic compounds may

restrict the use of methanol, a common

windshield washer anti-freeze additive.

Washer fluids containing

non-methanol anti-freeze agents

should be used only if they provide cold

weather protection without damaging

the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades

or washer system.

BRAKE FLUID CHECK

!WARNING:

The fluid level will drop as the brake

pads wear. If the level is very low the

brake warning indicator will illuminate

and a message BRAKE FLUID LOW will

be displayed. Seek qualified assistance

immediately. Do not drive the vehicle

until the cause is rectified as driving

under such conditions could result in

extended stopping distances or

complete brake failure.

Caution:

•While handling brake fluid, take

extreme care; brake fluid can

damage the vehicle paintwork.

•Always use fresh, clean fluid from a

new container. Never introduce

used brake fluid into the system.

The fluid is visible through the translucent

casing of the reservoir and must be

maintained at the MAX mark.

Topping up:

1. Remove the reservoir top cover.

2. Clean the reservoir and cap

thoroughly with a lint free cloth to

ensure that no foreign matter enters

the reservoir.

3. Unscrew the filler cap and top up to

the MAX level using brake fluid to

specification Shell DOT 4 ESL or low

viscosity DOT 4 brake fluid that meets

ISO 4925 class 6 specification. Only

fluid of this type and standard may be

used.

JAG0369N

241

Maintenance

4. Refit the filler cap securely and refit

the cover.

POWER STEERING FLUID

CHECK

Caution: It is imperative that the power

steering system does not become

contaminated in any way. Always use

new fluid and clean the area around the

reservoir neck both before and after

topping up.

1. Check the fluid level when the engine

is COLD and the vehicle is on a flat,

level surface.

2. Wipe clean and remove the filler cap

from the reservoir; take great care to

prevent any foreign matter from

entering.

3. Check that the fluid level is between

the marks on the reservoir dipstick.

4. If necessary, top up with DEXRON III

power steering fluid, DO NOT

OVERFILL.

5. Refit the filler cap.

If the level be very low, seek qualified

assistance as soon as possible.

JAG0370G

Vehicle Battery

242

Vehicle Battery

BATTERY WARNING SYMBOLS

There is a label on the battery depicting a

number of warning signs. The warning

signs are as follows:

No smoking, no flames, no sparks (Red).

Shield eyes (Blue).

Keep away from children (Red).

Explosive gas (Yellow).

Battery acid (Yellow).

1. DANGER/POISON

2. NO

•SPARKS

•FLAMES

•SMOKING

3. FLUSH EYES IMMEDIATELY

GET MEDICAL HELP FAST

4. SULFURIC ACID can cause blindness

or severe burns

5. KEEP OUT OF THE REACH OF

CHILDREN

DO NOT TIP

KEEP VENT CAP TIGHT AND LEVEL

6. SHIELD EYES

EXPLOSIVE GASES CAN CAUSE

BLINDNESS OR INJURY

JAG0443N

243

Vehicle Battery

BATTERY CARE

!WARNING:

•The cell plugs and vent pipe must

be in place at all times when the

battery is in the vehicle. Failure to

fit, or incorrect fitting of these items

is potentially hazardous. Ensure

that the vent pipe is free from kinks

or damage.

•If battery acid comes into contact

with skin or eyes immediately rinse

with cold water and consult a

doctor.

•Never charge or boost a frozen

battery.

•Switch off ignition before

disconnecting battery terminals.

Always disconnect the ground

terminal first and reconnect last.

•Do not let battery acid come into

contact with painted surfaces or

fabric.

•California Proposition 65:

Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories, contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash hands after

handling.

A low maintenance battery specifically

designed for use with this vehicle is fitted

in the luggage compartment.

In hot climates more frequent checks of

the battery electrolyte level are required. If

necessary, the battery cells can be

topped up with distilled water.

The exterior of the battery should be

occasionally wiped clean to remove any

dirt or grease.

Note: Do not connect any 12 volt

equipment, (for example, a 12 volt lamp),

directly to the battery terminals. Use the

accessory socket located in the glove box

for connecting Jaguar approved

accessories.

Replacement batteries

!WARNING:

Only fit a replacement battery of the

same type and specification as the

original - other batteries may vary in

size or have different terminal

positions which could cause a fire

hazard when connected to the

vehicle’s electrical system.

Battery disposal

Used batteries should be recycled.

However, batteries are hazardous - you

should seek advice about disposal from a

Jaguar Dealer or your local authority.

USING BOOSTER CABLES

!WARNING:

•Always wear appropriate eye

protection when working with

batteries.

•During normal use, batteries emit

explosive hydrogen gas - ensure

sparks and naked lights are kept

away from the engine

compartment.

•Do not attempt to start the vehicle if

the electrolyte in the battery is

suspected of being frozen.

Vehicle Battery

244

•Make sure both batteries are of the

same voltage (12 volts), and that the

booster cables have insulated

clamps and are approved for use

with 12 volt batteries.

•Do not disconnect the discharged

battery.

•Do not connect positive (+)

terminals to negative (-) terminals,

and ensure booster cables are kept

away from any moving parts in the

engine compartment.

•Take care when working near

rotating parts of the engine.

Caution:

•If using a boost start vehicle, under

no circumstances should the

vehicles come into contact with

each other. This could establish an

earth connection, which may cause

sparks and damage.

•Do not run the boost start vehicle’s

engine when boost starting a

Jaguar vehicle. If the boost start

vehicle’s engine is running and the

jump leads are disconnected,

damage to the Jaguar vehicle’s

electrical system will result.

This vehicle is fitted with automatic

transmission. In the event of a discharged

battery preventing a normal engine start,

the vehicle cannot be started by pushing

or towing. Either use booster cables

connected to a booster battery (e.g. on

another vehicle) or fit a fully charged

battery.

Using booster cables (jump leads) from a

donor battery, or a battery fitted to a

donor vehicle, is the only approved

method of starting a vehicle with a

discharged battery. This procedure differs

to that used to charge a battery, which

should not be attempted with the battery

connected to the vehicle.

Boosting from another vehicle

!WARNING:

Do not use a 24 volt booster start

system. These produce excessive

voltage and can damage the vehicle’s

electrical system.

If a donor vehicle is to be used, both

vehicles should be parked with their

battery locations adjacent to each other.

Ensure that the two vehicles do not touch.

Apply the parkbrakes and ensure that the

transmission of both vehicles is set in

neutral (P - park for vehicles with

automatic transmission).

Ensure that both vehicles have all

electrical services OFF.

Where the booster cables are of a

different colour, e.g. red and black, use

red for positive (+). This aids identification

and helps to avoid crossing positive (+) to

negative (–). Take extra care to avoid

crossing the polarity when using cables of

the same colour.

245

Vehicle Battery

Procedure for using booster cables

The following procedure must be followed

exactly:

1. Remove the left-hand side luggage

compartment trim panel cover to

access the vehicle battery positive (+)

remote charge terminal, remove the

protective cap from the terminal.

2. Attach one end of the red jump lead to

the positive (+) terminal of the booster

battery and the other end to the

positive (+) remote charge terminal of

the vehicle battery.

3. Lift the luggage compartment floor

panel to reveal the spare wheel.

Remove the protective cap from the

negative (-) terminal of the vehicle

battery remote charge terminal.

4. Attach one end of the black jump lead

to the negative (-) terminal of the

booster battery and the other end to

the negative (-) terminal of the vehicle

battery remote charge terminal.

5. Start the disabled vehicle. Allow the

engine to idle for five minutes before

disconnecting the cables.

6. Disconnect the black jump lead from

the negative (-) terminal of the vehicle

battery remote charge terminal and

the booster battery negative (-)

terminal.

7. Disconnect the red jump lead from the

positive (+) remote charge terminal of

the vehicle and the booster battery

positive (+) terminal.

8. Refit the terminal covers, trim panel

and luggage compartment floor

panel.

It may be necessary to reset the electric

parkbrake, see page 164. See also 246.

CHARGING THE VEHICLE

BATTERY

!WARNING:

Batteries produce combustible gas

(hydrogen) when being charged. The

battery must be removed from the

vehicle before charging commences.

Due to the restricted accessibility of the

centrally located battery, charging of the

battery should be assigned to qualified

assistance.

JAG0373G

Vehicle Battery

246

If the message BATTERY NOT

CHARGING is displayed there is either a

generator or battery fault. Turn off all

electrical accessories, radio, climate

control etc. Try to use minimum electrical

load as possible such as power windows,

convertible top etc. Seek qualified

assistance as soon as possible.

Effects of battery disconnection

After reconnecting the battery:

•Reset the electric parkbrake; see

page 164.

•Reset the electrically operated

windows anti-trap function; see page

87.

•The trip computer will lose all

recorded trip data and all trip

functions will be reset to zero. The

vehicle total odometer reading is

retained.

•If the battery is disconnected for more

than 72 hours the radio preset

channels will need to be reset.

•Reset the clock to the correct time,

see page 142.

•Recalibrate the seat memory

positions; see page 139.

The engine electronic control system

automatically adapts to certain

characteristics of the vehicle. When the

battery is disconnected, these

adaptations are lost.

On reconnection, therefore, some slightly

abnormal drive symptoms may occur and

the vehicle may need to be driven

16 kilometers (10 miles) or more while the

control system re-adapts.

When the vehicle main battery is

disconnected and then reconnected, the

security system immediately returns to

the state that it was when the battery was

disconnected.

Note: Ensure that a remote handset is

available to disarm the system when

reconnecting the battery. Either press the

unlock button on the transmitter, or press

the START/STOP button for

convenience mode.

Wheels and Tires

256

Wheels and Tires

TIRE CARE

Tire glossary

Refer to page 278 for a glossary of terms

and definitions associated with tire

pressures and vehicle weights.

Tire pressures

!WARNING:

Improperly inflated tires can affect

vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,

possibly resulting in loss of vehicle

control.

Caution: Never exceed the maximum

pressure stated on the sidewall. Over

inflation could cause the tire to fail

suddenly.

In the interest of safety, reliability and fuel

efficiency, check the tires, including the

spare, for condition and pressure on a

weekly basis and before long journeys.

Pressure checks must be carried out

when the tires are cold and the vehicle

has been standing in ambient local

conditions for at least one hour.

Do not check tire pressures immediately

after the vehicle has travelled in excess of

1.6 km (1mile). Tire temperatures and

pressures increase when running.

Deflating a warm tire to the recommended

pressure will result in under inflation.

If tire pressures are checked while the

vehicle is inside a protected covered area,

e.g. a garage, and subsequently driven in

lower outdoor temperatures, tire under

inflation could occur.

A slight pressure loss occurs naturally

with time. If this exceeds 0.14 bar

(2 lbf/in2, 14 kPa) per week, have the

cause investigated and rectified by a

qualified assistance.

If winter tires are fitted, please refer to the

winter tire pressure information on page

265.

Tire pressure label

(Canada and Mexico only)

A tire recommendation label is located on

the end of driver’s door, giving

information specific to the vehicle’s wheel

and tire equipment.

These pressures provide optimum ride

and handling characteristics for all normal

operating conditions.

JAG0057G

257

Wheels and Tires

Tire pressure label/placard (USA only)

A tire information label is visible on the

pillar behind the driver’s door (also known

as the B pillar), giving information specific

to the wheel and tire equipment fitted to

the vehicle when it was built.

These pressures provide optimum ride

and handling characteristics for all normal

operating conditions.

The label contains the following

information:

•The maximum number of occupants

1, divided between the front 2 and

rear 3 of the vehicle.

•The vehicle capacity weight 4, which

includes the weight of the driver,

passengers and cargo.

•Cold inflation pressures for the front,

rear and spare tire 5.

•The size of the tires 6 with which the

vehicle was originally equipped.

Note: The label must not be changed,

even if different wheels are fitted at a

later stage.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

SEE OWNER’S

MANUAL FOR

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

SEATING CAPACITY

TOTAL 4

FRONT 2 REAR 2

TIRE COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE

FRONT

REAR

SPARE

XXX/XXRXX

TXXX/XXRXX

XXPSI XXXkpa

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXXXlbs

RTC500490

SIZE

XXX/XXRXX XXPSI XXXkpa

XXPSI XXXkpa

6 5

2 3

JAG0394N

Wheels and Tires

258

Recommended tire pressures

The following table gives the tire pressures for all recommended tire sizes:

Checking tire pressures

The following procedure should be used

to check and adjust the tire pressures

when cold:

1. Remove the valve cover.

2. Firmly attach a tire pressure gauge or

inflator to the valve.

3. Read the tire pressure from the

gauge. If required, add air to the tire.

4. If air is added to the tire, remove the

gauge from the valve and re-attach it

before checking that the pressure is

correct. Failure to remove and

re-attach the gauge could cause the

gauge to show an incorrect reading.

5. If too much air is added, remove the

gauge from the valve and allow air out

of the tire by pressing the centre of the

valve. Reconnect the gauge to the

valve, and check that the air pressure

is correct.

6. Refit the valve cover.

A slight natural pressure loss occurs with

time. If this exceeds 14 kPa (2 lbf/in2) per

week, the cause should be investigated

and rectified.

Note: It is an offence in certain countries

to drive a vehicle with tires that are not

inflated in accordance with the vehicle’s

proper use.

Tire Size Tire Pressure

Front Rear

245/45ZR18 100Z 210 k Pa (30 lb/in2)-

275/40ZR18 103Z - 227.5 kPa (33 lb/in2)

245/40ZR19 94Y 210 kPa (30 lb/in2)-

275/35ZR19 96Y - 227.5 kPa (33 lb/in2)

255/35ZR20 97Y 210 kPa (30 lb/in2)-

285/30ZR20 99Y - 227.5 kPa (33 lb/in2)

19 inch run-flat: - -

245/40R19 RSC 94Y 210 kPa (30 lb/in2)-

275/35R19 RSC 96Y - 227.5 kPa (33 lb/in2)

Temporary use spare wheel (front or rear) 420 kPa (60 lb/in2)

259

Wheels and Tires

Ambient temperature pressure

compensation

If the intended journey will take the vehicle

into an area where the ambient local

temperature is known to be lower than the

journey start point, tire pressure under

inflation could occur.

A colder ambient local temperature will

reduce pressure within the tire. An effect

is to decrease sidewall height and to

increase tire shoulder wear with the

potential for tire failure. Vehicle dynamics

could also be adversely affected.

In order to minimise this effect, tire

pressures can be adjusted to

compensate before the start of the

journey. Alternatively, tire pressures can

be adjusted when the area of lower

ambient temperature is reached.

In this situation the vehicle must be left in

the ambient local temperature for a least

one hour before tire pressure is adjusted.

To compensate for colder ambient

temperatures, tire pressures should be

increased by 0.14 bar (2 lbf/in2, 14 kPa)

for each 10°C (20°F) decrease.

Note: Ensure that correct tire pressures

are maintained when moving to areas of

differing ambient temperature.

The Tire Pressure Monitoring system

(TPMS) may issue a warning if the under

inflation becomes significant. When

driving through variable climatic

conditions the TPMS warnings may be

intermittent.

In areas of extended high ambient

temperature, vehicle tires can be affected

by a softening of the tire side wall. If the

vehicle is stationary for long periods, the

effect is to slightly deform the tire at the

point where the tire meets the standing

surface. This is known as a flat spot.

This is normal tire behaviour, however,

when the vehicle is subsequently driven

vibration may be experienced from the flat

spot. The condition will steadily improve

with additional mileage.

In order to minimise this effect, tire

pressures can be adjusted to

compensate.

JAG0480G

JAG0481G

Wheels and Tires

260

For each 10°C (20°F) increase in

temperature above 20°C (68°F), tire

pressure should be increased by 14 kPa

(2 lbf/in2).

Tire pressure compensation chart -

high ambient temperatures

Tire Pressure Temperature

Compensation

Ambient

Temperature

0 C (0 F)

Pressure

Compensation

bar (lbf/in2 /kPa)

20 (68) use placard label

30 (86) + 0.14 (2 / 14)

40 (104) + 0.28 (4 / 28)

50 (122) + 0.41 (6 / 41)

261

Wheels and Tires

Tire Markings

P, 1

The P indicates the tire is for passenger

vehicles.

Tire width, 2

This three-digit number gives the width in

millimetres of the tire from sidewall edge

to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the

number, the wider the tire.

Aspect ratio, 3

This two-digit number, known as the

aspect ratio, gives the tire's ratio of height

to width (this is also known as the tire

profile). The lower the number, the shorter

the tire’s sidewall.

R, 4

The R stands for radial. Radial ply

construction of tires has been the industry

standard for the past 20 years.

Wheel diameter, 5

This two-digit number is the wheel or rim

diameter in inches. If you change your

wheel size, you will have to purchase new

tires to match the new wheel diameter.

Load index, 6

This two- or three-digit number is the

tire's load index. It is a measurement of

how much weight each tire can support.

Note: You may not find this information

on all tires because it is not required by

law.

JAG0395N

234 5 67

Wheels and Tires

262

Speed rating, 7

The speed rating denotes the speed at

which a tire is designed to be driven for

extended periods of time. The ratings

range from 99 mph to 186 mph. These

ratings are listed in the following table.

Note: You may not find this information

on all tires because it is not required by

law.

U.S DOT Tire Identification Number

(TIN), 8

This begins with the letters DOT and

indicates that the tire meets all federal

standards. The next two numbers or

letters are the plant code where it was

manufactured, and the last four numbers

represent the week and year the tire was

built. For example, the numbers 3197

means the 31st week of 1997. The other

numbers are marketing codes used at the

manufacturer's discretion. This

information can be used to contact

consumers if a tire defect requires a

recall.

M+S and all season icon, 9

The M+S or M/S indicates that the tire

has some mud and snow capability. Most

radial tires have these markings.

Tires with all season icon have a level of

winter performance.

Tire ply composition and materials

used, 10

The number of plies indicates the number

of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the

tire. In general, the greater the number of

plies, the more weight a tire can support.

Tire manufacturers also must indicate the

materials in the tire, which include steel,

nylon, polyester, and others.

Letter Rating Speed Rating

Q99 mph

R 106 mph

S 112 mph

T 118 mph

U 124 mph

H 130 mph

V 149 mph

W 168 mph

Y 186 mph*

* For tires with a maximum speed

capability over 149 mph, tire

manufacturers sometimes use the

letters ZR. For those with a maximum

speed capability over 186 mph, tire

manufacturers always use the letters

ZR.

263

Wheels and Tires

Treadwear number, 11

This number indicates the tire's wear rate.

The higher the treadwear number is, the

longer it should take for the tread to wear

down. For example, a tire graded 400

should last twice as long as a tire graded

200.

Traction letter, 12

This letter indicates a tire's ability to stop

on wet pavement. A higher graded tire

should allow you to stop your car on wet

roads in a shorter distance than a tire with

a lower grade. Traction is graded from

highest to lowest as AA, A, B, and C.

Maximum load rating, 13

This number indicates the maximum load

in kilograms and pounds that can be

carried by the tire.

Temperature letter, 14

This letter indicates a tire's resistance to

heat. The temperature grade is for a tire

that is inflated properly and not

overloaded. Excessive speed,

underinflation or excessive loading, either

separately or in combination, can cause

heat build-up and possible tire failure.

From highest to lowest, a tire's resistance

to heat is graded as A, B, or C.

Maximum permissible inflation

pressure, 15

This number is the greatest amount of air

pressure that should ever be put in the tire

under normal driving conditions.

Tire pressures during long term vehicle

storage

To minimise the possibility and effects of

flat spots during storage, the tires may be

inflated to the maximum pressure

indicated on the tire sidewall.

Note: Before using the stored vehicle on

the road again, ensure that correct tire

pressures are restored.

Wear

All tires fitted as original equipment

include Tread Wear Indicators (TWI) in

their tread pattern.

When the tread has worn to a remaining

depth of 1.6 mm the indicators appear at

the surface as bars which connect the

tread pattern across the full width of the

tire.

It is illegal, in certain countries, to

continue to use tires after the tread has

worn to less than 1.6 mm over three

quarters of the width and the entire

circumference of the tire.

It should be noted that the properties of

many tires alter progressively with wear.

In particular the wet grip and aquaplaning

resistance are gradually but substantially

reduced. Extra care and speed restriction

should therefore be exercised on wet

roads as the effective tread depth

diminishes.

JAG0393G

Wheels and Tires

264

Incorrect wheel alignment will accelerate

tire wear. If there is wear on the inner or

outer edges of the tread pattern it will be

advantageous to have the cause detected

by having the wheel alignment checked.

Do not interchange tires from side to side,

front to rear or vice versa.

Note:

1. On all models the rear wheel and tire

assemblies are larger than the front.

These larger assemblies must never

be fitted to the front of the vehicle.

2. On certain models the tires may be

directional type. These tires must be

fitted so that when viewed from the

side of the vehicle, direction of

rotation arrow, on the tire wall, points

in the vehicle forward direction of

travel when positioned at the top of

the tire.

Damage

Caution: Do not use paraffin

(kerosene), because this has a

detrimental effect on rubber.

Excessive local distortion can cause the

casing of a tire to fracture and may lead to

premature failure. Tires should be

examined especially for cracked walls,

exposed cords, etc. Flints and other

sharp objects must be removed from the

tire tread; if left in they may work through

the cover. Clean off any oil or grease

contamination by using a suitable cleaner.

Tire repair

Damaged tires should be replaced with

new tires fitted. They must not be repaired

in view of the high performance capability

of the vehicle.

Tire replacement

When replacing tires, it is preferable to fit

a complete vehicle set. If either front or

rear tires only need to be renewed, new

tires must be fitted as axle sets.

After new tires have been fitted the

wheels need to be dynamically balanced.

Do not fit tires with a different tread

pattern, size or speed rating.

The installation of replacement tires with

steel cord body plies in the tire sidewall

may cause malfunction of the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) and

is not recommended (cord material

information is moulded on the tire

sidewall).

Additionally, if your vehicle was equipped

with run-flat tires, replacing them with

tires that are not identical to those

originally fitted may cause malfunction of

the TPMS, and is not recommended.

Always check your TPMS indicator after

replacing one or more tires on your

vehicle. See TPMS, page 267.

Tire ageing

!WARNING:

Tires degrade over time, even when

they are not being used. It is

recommended that tires generally be

replaced after six years of normal

service. Heat caused by hot climates or

frequent high loading conditions can

accelerate the ageing process.

You should replace the spare tire when

you replace the other road tires due to

the ageing of the spare tire.

265

Wheels and Tires

USING WINTER TIRES

Winter tires are more suitable during

extremes of low temperatures, snow and

ice and will considerably improve the

vehicle’s handling during these

conditions.

Do not exceed 240 km/h (150 mph) when

using Jaguar approved winter tires.

Winter tires must be fitted on all four

wheels.

Approved Winter tire sizes

Front: 245/45R18, Dunlop Wintersport

M3 96V.

Rear: 265/40R18, Dunlop Wintersport M3

97V.

Winter tire pressures:

USING SNOW CHAINS

!WARNING:

Trac DSC must be switched ON when

using snow chains. DSC would reduce

the deep snow traction capability as it

would limit wheel spin to a level below

that which is required to generate

maximum traction.

Caution: Do not fit snow chains to

20 inch tires.

Snow chains, of the recommended type,

can only be fitted to rear wheels. They

should not be used on temporary use

spare wheels.

You should contact your Jaguar Dealer

for details and availability of approved

snow chains.

The maximum speed when using snow

chains is 48 km/h (30 mph).

Remove the snow chains immediately the

roads are clear of snow.

Ensure the fitting instructions supplied

with the snow chains are kept in a safe

place, for example, with this literature

pack.

Up to 240 km/h (150 mph)

Front

(245)

2.0 bar (30 lbf/in2, 207 ka)

Rear

(265)

2.3 bar (33 lbf/in2, 230 kPa)

Wheels and Tires

266

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Recommended tire fitment

The following chart details the tires recommended for use in USA, Canada, Mexico and

the Dominican Republic:

For all other countries refer to your local Jaguar Dealer for specific tire fitment.

Tire size Pattern

Front 245/45ZR18 100Z Continental Sport Contact 2 Asymmetric

Rear 275/40ZR18 103Z Continental Sport Contact 2 Asymmetric

Front 245/40ZR19 94Y Dunlop Sport 01 Asymmetric

Rear 275/35ZR19 96Y Dunlop Sport 01 Asymmetric

Front 255/35ZR20 97Y Dunlop Sportmaxx Directional

Rear 285/30ZR20 99Y Dunlop Sportmaxx Directional

19 inch Run-flat

Front 245/40R19 RSC 94Y Dunlop Sport 01 DSST

Rear 275/35R19 RSC 96Y Dunlop Sport 01 DSST

Temporary use spare wheel

Front and Rear:

Alloy 4 x 18 T135/80 R18 Pirelli

267

Wheels and Tires

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

!WARNING:

•The TPMS is not a substitute for

manually checking tire pressures.

Tire pressures should be checked

regularly using an accurate

pressure gauge when cold. Failure

to properly maintain your tire

pressures could increase the risk of

tire failure, with consequential loss

of vehicle control and personal

injury.

•The TPMS cannot register damage

to a tire. Regularly check the

condition of your tires, especially if

the vehicle is driven off road.

Note:

1. Non-approved accessories may

interfere with the system. If this

occurs, TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM

FAULT is displayed in the message

centre.

2. Tires may affect the performance of

the TPMS. Always replace tires in

accordance with recommendations,

see page 266.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a

TPMS which monitors pressure in each

tire (temporary use spare tires are not

fitted with sensors and are consequently

not monitored).

Wheels fitted with a TPMS can be easily

visually identified by the external metal

lock nut and valve 1. All Jaguar

non-TPMS wheels have a rubber valve

fitted 2.

TPMS operation

The TPMS monitors the pressure of the

tires via sensors located in each wheel

and a receiver located within the vehicle.

Communication between sensor and

receiver is via Radio Frequency (RF)

signals.

The tire pressure warning

comprises a yellow warning

telltale within the instrument

cluster and an associated message within

the message centre.

JAG0389G

Wheels and Tires

268

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold

and inflated to the inflation pressure

recommended by the vehicle

manufacturer on the vehicle placard or

tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle

has tires of a different size than the size

indicated on the vehicle placard or tire

inflation pressure label, you should

determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires).

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) that

illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

when one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure

telltale illuminates, you should stop and

check your tires as soon as possible, and

inflate them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated

tire causes the tire to overheat and can

lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire maintenance,

and it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if

under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

The TPMS may issue a warning if the

under inflation becomes significant. When

driving through variable climatic

conditions the TPMS warnings may be

intermittent.

Caution: When inflating tires, care

should be taken to avoid bending or

damage to the TPMS valves. Always

ensure correct alignment of the

inflation head to the valve stem.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with

a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating

properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is

combined with the low tire pressure

telltale. When the system detects a

malfunction, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then

remain continuously illuminated. This

sequence will continue upon subsequent

vehicle start-ups as long as the

malfunction exists

When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated, the system may not be able to

detect or signal low tire pressure as

intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur

for a variety of reasons, including the

installation of replacement or alternate

tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent

the TPMS from functioning properly.

AVE FUEL

MPG

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE

JAG0060NAS

269

Wheels and Tires

Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

A supplementary text message will

accompany the system indicator and will

display TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM

FAULT.

Temporary use spare wheel and tire

change

Should it be necessary to change a wheel

and tire with the temporary use spare,

then the system will automatically

recognise the change in wheel positions.

Then after approximately ten minutes of

driving above 25 km/h (18 mph) , a text

message TIRE NOT MONITORED will be

displayed accompanied by illumination of

the warning telltale and the corresponding

block in the vehicle graphic.

The warning telltale will initially flash and

will subsequently revert to continuous

illumination. Extended use of the

temporary use spare wheel will produce

an additional text message TIRE

PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT.

The TPMS display sequence will be

activated at every ignition cycle until the

temporary use spare wheel is replaced by

a fully operational full size wheel and tire

assembly.

Always replace the temporary use spare

wheel before having TPMS faults

investigated. The fault may well be

rectified with the fitment of a fully

operational full size running tire in lieu of

the temporary use wheel and tire

assembly.

If a tire needs to be changed

It is recommended that you should always

have your tires serviced by a Jaguar

Dealer.

If a TPMS is fitted, each wheel and tire

assembly, with the exception of a

temporary use spare is equipped with a

tire pressure sensor connected to the tire

valve stem.

In order to avoid damage to the sensor

the tires must be removed and refitted to

the road wheel in a specific manner. Care

must be taken to avoid contact between

the bead of the tire and the sensor during

removal and refitting of the tire, otherwise

the sensor may become damaged and or

inoperable.

Caution: Valve stem seal, washer, nut,

valve core and cap should be replaced

at every tire change. Valve stem seal,

washer and nut must be replaced if

valve retention nut is loosened. Sensor

units and nuts must be refitted using

correct torques and associated torque

profile. Damage to the vehicle may

result if these precautions are not

taken.

Sensors can be removed from the wheel

by the unscrewing of the valve retention

nut.

Replacement sensor fitment

procedure

A replacement sensor must be fitted to a

running wheel in order to be recognised

by the system. Recognition only occurs

when the vehicle is driven above 25 km/h

(18 mph) for approximately ten minutes.

Wheels and Tires

270

Should the TPMS warning for any wheel

not clear, even after ensuring correct

inflation pressures and driving for more

than ten minutes above 25 km/h (18 mph),

contact your Jaguar Dealer.

TPMS information messages

Message Warning

Light

Priority

Indicator

Meaning

CHECK TIRE

PRESSURE

(Graphic indication

displays which tire is

under inflated.)

TPMS Amber You should as soon as possible

stop, check your tire and inflate

them to the recommended

pressure.

CHECK ALL TIRE

PRESSURES

TPMS Amber One or more tire is significantly

under-inflated. You stop as soon

as possible, check your tires and

inflate them to the recommended

pressure. This message may be

displayed when the vehicle is

learning a new sensor to vehicle

and one or more tires has low

pressure.

TIRE PRESSURE

SYSTEM FAULT

TPMS Amber 1. You have fitted wheels and

tires which do not have TPMS

sensors. You should as soon as

possible have TPMS sensors

fitted to wheels and tires.

2. TPMS sensors have become

defective, an unapproved

accessory is interfering with the

TPMS or a general fault has been

detected in the TPMS. Contact a

Jaguar Dealer as soon as

possible.

271

Wheels and Tires

TIRE NOT MONITORED

(Graphic indication

displays which tire is not

monitored.)

TPMS Amber 1. You have a temporary use

spare wheel fitted at the

corresponding position.

You should limit your vehicle

speed to 80 km/h (50 mph)

and as soon as possible

replace the temporary use

spare wheel with a correctly

inflated full size tire.

2. The TPMS sensor, at the

corresponding position, has

become defective, an

unapproved accessory is

interfering with the TPMS or

you have fitted a wheel and

tire which does not have a

sensor. Contact a Jaguar

Dealer as soon as possible.

TPMS information messages

Message Warning

Light

Priority

Indicator

Meaning

Wheels and Tires

272

WHEEL CHANGING

!WARNING:

•Always ensure replacement tires

have the correct rating and

specifications (e.g. load index, size,

speed rating) for your vehicle.

•When using tires other than those

recommended by Jaguar, do not

exceed the speed capacity

recommended by the

manufacturer.

•Wheels are extremely heavy. Take

care when lifting and particularly

when removing and replacing a

wheel in its storage position in the

luggage compartment.

If a wheel change is required, pull off the

road completely. Park on ground which is

as level and solid as possible. Ensure that

the vehicle is clear of any objects that will

obstruct the safe removal of the wheel.

Switch on hazard warning lights and,

where legally required, display the

warning triangle.

Regular maintenance of tires contributes

not only to safety, but to the designed

function of the vehicle. Road-holding,

steering and braking are especially

vulnerable to incorrectly pressurised,

badly fitted or worn tires.

Tires of the correct size and type, but of

different make can varying

characteristics. It is therefore

recommended that Jaguar approved tires

are fitted to all wheels.

Caution: Ultra high performance tires.

This vehicle is equipped with an Ultra

High Performance (UHP) tire and wheel

combination designed to give

maximum dry road performance with

consideration for aquaplaning

resistance. UHP tires have

performance enhancing soft rubber

tread compound. If driven aggressively

they may suffer rapid tread wear and a

shorter life than can be expected from

other tire types. This wheel and tire

combination is more susceptible to

damage from road hazards.

Do not use this combination for driving

on snow or ice. High perfromance tires

must be replaced with winter tires

when weather conditions dictate.

Temporary use spare wheel

IMPORTANT - USE OF SPARE TIRE

Observe the following warnings before

using the wheel:

!WARNING:

•Please note temporary use spare

wheel warning label. Adhere to

instructions on the label. Failure to

comply can be dangerous.

•When a temporary use spare wheel

is fitted, drive with caution and

replace with the specified wheel

and tire as soon as possible.

•Do not fit more than one temporary

use spare wheel and tire assembly

at one time.

•The temporary use spare wheel

must be inflated to 4.2 bar (60 lb/in2,

420 kPa) and cannot be repaired.

273

Wheels and Tires

•Temporary use spare wheel,

maximum speed is 80 km/h

(50 mph).

•If the vehicle is fitted with Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) refer to page 267.

•DSC must be ON when the

temporary use spare wheel is in

use.

Run-flat tires

!WARNING:

If a run-flat is deflated maximum

vehicle speed must not exceed 80 km/h

(50 mph).

Run-flat tires can be identified by the

lettering RSC on the sidewall. The tire

construction utilises a specially reinforced

sidewall which allows the vehicle to be

driven at restricted speeds even when the

tire is depressurised. Run-flat tires can

only be fitted to special rims constructed

for run-flat tire use.

A tire pressure monitoring system is

mandatory when the vehicle is fitted with

run-flat tires, see page 267.

If the tire in a deflated the vehicle should

be driven with caution, as handling

characteristics will be different compared

to a fully inflated tire.

If the vehicle is fully laden with

passengers and luggage, the maximum

distance that can be completed on a fully

deflated tire is approximately

80 kilometres (50 miles).

Stop immediately if the tire construction

begins to break down, or if the tire

dislodges from the wheel rim. Typically,

this will be accompanied with excessive

vibration.

A tire driven in a deflated condition it must

be replaced.

Vehicles fitted with run-flat tires are not

fitted with a spare wheel or jacking

equipment. Therefore, run-flat tires

should be replaced with the same type of

tire.

JAG0384G

Wheels and Tires

274

Locking wheel nuts

Vehicles may be equipped with a locking

wheel nut on each wheel. These are

similar to standard wheel nuts, and can

only be removed using the special

adaptor provided with the jacking

equipment.

1. Insert the adaptor firmly onto the

locking wheel nut.

2. Using the wheel brace, unscrew the

wheel nut and adaptor.

3. Return the locking wheel nut adaptor

to the correct storage position.

Note: A code number is stamped on the

side of the locking nut. Ensure the number

is recorded on the Security Card supplied

with the literature pack. Quote this

number if a replacement is required. Do

not keep the Security Card in the vehicle.

Spare wheel location

The spare wheel and jacking equipment

are stored under the luggage

compartment floor panel.

To remove the spare wheel, remove the

luggage compartment floor panel and the

tray containing the jacking equipment.

Unscrew the spare wheel retaining Tee

bolt and remove the spare wheel.

Remove the jack and wheel nut wrench

from the stowage tray.

Note: Examine the jack occasionally and

clean and grease the threads to ensure it

is always ready for an emergency.

JAG0561G

JAG0386G

275

Wheels and Tires

Wheel changing procedure

!WARNING:

•Before attempting to lift the vehicle

with the jack, chock the wheel

diagonally opposite to the wheel

being replaced to prevent the

vehicle from rolling when jacked

up. A wheel chock is supplied with

the jacking equipment for this

purpose.

•Never work under the vehicle using

only the jack as a support, always

use axle stands or suitable

supports under the jacking points.

Note: When one rear wheel is lifted off the

ground the selection P (Park) position will

not prevent the vehicle from moving and

possibly slipping off the jack as the

parkbrake only operates on the rear

wheels.

1. Ensure that all passengers are in a

safe place, clear of the vehicle.

2. Apply the parkbrake and select gear

position P (Park).

3. Ensure that the jack is placed on firm

and level ground.

Observe the instructions printed on the

jack.

Use the jack only for lifting the vehicle

during wheel changing and only use the

jack which is stored in the vehicle.

Before raising the vehicle slacken but do

not remove the wheel nuts.

Do not start or run the engine while the

vehicle is supported only by a jack.

There are four jacking points on the

underside of the floor. Two indented,

triangular indicators are provided on each

sill cover. These indicate the location for

the jack.

The simplest way to correctly locate the

jacking point is to feel along the sill panel

to the triangular indentation and then fit

the jack to the body, not to the sill panel.

JAG0387G

Wheels and Tires

276

Raising the vehicle

!WARNING:

•Do not attempt to lift the vehicle

unless the jack head is fully

engaged in the jacking point.

•Ensure that the parkbrake is

applied.

Caution: Ensure before raising the

vehicle that the jack is correctly

positioned to avoid any damage to the

vehicle sills or sill panels.

Carefully raise the vehicle by turning the

jack handle. Stop jacking the vehicle

when the tire just clears the ground.

Minimum tire lift gives maximum vehicle

stability.

Remove the wheel nuts and the wheel.

To remove the centre badge use the

plastic tipped end of the wheel nut

wrench handle, push the centre badge

from its housing from the inside of the

wheel.

Push the centre badge into the

replacement wheel. If the temporary use

spare wheel is to be fitted, keep the

centre badge safely and fit it to the

repaired full size wheel when it has been

refitted.

Fit the spare wheel and loosely secure

with the wheel nuts.

Using the wheel nut wrench, lightly

tighten the wheel nuts alternately using

the sequence shown in the illustration.

Tightening the wheel nuts

Lower the jack and tighten the wheel nuts

alternately, Do not over tighten by using

foot pressure or extension bars on the

wheel nut wrench.

At the earliest opportunity have the wheel

nuts tightened with a torque wrench to

125 Nm (92 lb.ft).

This torque must not be exceeded.

Stowing the equipment

Place the storage tray with the jack and

wrench in the wheel well.

Reposition the luggage compartment

floor panel.

Place the removed road wheel in the

luggage compartment. The full size road

wheel will not be able to be completely

stowed in the wheel well.

Caution: Convertible only. The luggage

separator will required to be removed

before stowing the wheel in the

luggage compartment, see page 151.

JAG0388G

277

Wheels and Tires

UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT

OF TRANSPORTATION/

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY

GRADES

The following information relates to the

tire grading system developed by the

National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration which will grade tires by

tread wear, traction and temperature

performance.

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a comparative

rating based on the wear rate of the tire

when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would

wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on

the government course as a tire

graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use,

however, and may depart significantly

from the norm due to variations in driving

habits, service practices and differences

in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from the highest to

the lowest are AA,A, B and C. The

grades represent the tire’s ability to stop

on wet pavement as measured under

controlled conditions on specified

government test surfaces of asphalt and

concrete. A tire marked C may have poor

traction performance.

!WARNING:

The traction grade assigned to this tire

is based on straight-ahead braking

traction tests and does not include

cornering (turning) traction tests and

does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak

traction characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A

(the highest), B and C representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of heat

and its ability to dissipate heat when

tested under controlled conditions on a

specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause

the material of the tire to degenerate and

reduce tire life, and excessive

temperature can lead to sudden tire

failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of

performance which all passenger car tires

must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

!WARNING:

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not over loaded. Excessive

speed, under-inflation or excessive

loading, either separately or in

combination, can cause heat build-up

and possible tire failure.

Wheels and Tires

278

TIRE GLOSSARY

Cold tire pressure:

Pressure in a tire that has been driven for

less than one mile or has been standing

for three hours or more.

Maximum inflation pressure:

Maximum air pressure, to which a cold

tire may be inflated, this figure (in kPa and

psi) is moulded onto the sidewall of a tire.

Curb weight:

The weight of a motor vehicle with

standard equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil, coolant

and if so equipped, air conditioning and

additional weight optional engine.

Accessory weight:

The combined weight (in excess of those

standard items which may be replaced) of

automatic transmission, power steering,

power brakes, power windows, power

seats, radio and heater, to the extent that

these items are available as

factory-installed equipment (whether

installed or not).

Production options weight:

The combined weight of those installed

production options weighing over 1.4 kg

(3 lb) in excess of those standard items

which they replace, not previously

considered in curb weight or accessory

weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride

levellers, roof rack, heavy duty battery

and special trim.

Vehicle capacity weight:

The rated cargo and luggage load plus

68.0 kg (150.0 lb) times the vehicle’s

designated seating capacity.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight:

This is the sum of:

•Curb weight.

•Accessory weight.

•Vehicle capacity weight.

•Production options weight.

Rim:

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube

assembly upon which the tire beads are

seated.

Bead:

The part of the tire that is made of steel

wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords

and that is shaped to fit the rim.

279

Wheels and Tires

PRODUCTION OPTIONS

WEIGHTS

(USA only)

This table lists the production options

weights. To calculate the curbweight of

your vehicle, add the weight of all

production options, including optional

alloy wheels and spare wheel, to the basic

curbweight for your vehicle.

Note: The table only lists optional

equipment that weigh more than 3.0 lb

(1.4 kg).

!WARNING:

Do not exceed the weight limits

specified on the TIRE LOADING

INFORMATION label (see page 257).

To calculate the cargo and luggage load

capacity of your vehicle, refer to page

280.

Note:

The weights listed under Wheels and tires give the increase in weight over a standard

set of four wheels: the figure only needs to be added to the curbweight once. The Spare

wheel and tire weight must also be added, where applicable.

Weight

lb kg

Curb weight, no options fitted

See Technical Specification Weight Tables pages 283 and 284.

Production options

Jaguar Premium Surround Sound System 13.23 6.0

Sirius Satellite Radio 2.87 1.3

Navigation 4.9 2.2

16 way luxury sport seats 7.72 3.5

Adaptive Front Lighting System 3.31 1.5

Wheels and tires

18 inch wheels (Venus) 0 0

19 inch wheels (Carelia) 16.54 7.5

20 inch wheels (Senta), supercharged available 18.96 8.6

20 inch wheels (Senta), normally aspirated, if available 26.46 12.0

19 inch Run-flat tires (Sabre) deletes Temporary use spare wheel,

supercharged.

- 4.0 - 8.82

19 inch Run-flat tires (Sabre) deletes Temporary use spare wheel,

normally aspirated.

- 5.51 - 2.5

Wheels and Tires

280

Steps for determining correct load limit

!WARNING:

Do not exceed the vehicle capacity

weight (the total weight of driver,

passengers and cargo) given on the

tire information label (see page 257).

1. Locate the statement, The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed XXXX kg or

XXXX lb on your vehicle’s placard (see

page 257).

2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXXX kg

or XXXX lb (weight given on placard).

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For example, if

the XXXX amount equals 1400 lb, and

there will be five 150 lb passengers in

your vehicle, the amount of available

cargo and luggage load capacity is

650 lb:

1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb).

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo and

luggage load capacity calculated in

Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

The number and weight of passengers will

affect the cargo and luggage load

capacity. In the example above, the cargo

and luggage load capacity is 650 lb.

However, if fewer passengers ride in the

vehicle, the luggage load capacity will

increase. If this vehicle carries three

150 lb passengers, the cargo and luggage

load capacity will increase to 950 lb:

(3 x 150 = 450 lb, and

1400 - 450 = 950 lb).

If the passengers weigh more, the cargo

and luggage load capacity will decrease.

!WARNING:

•The weight of accessories must

also be subtracted from the

available cargo and luggage load

capacity. If you are unsure of the

weight of any accessories fitted to

your vehicle, contact your Jaguar

Dealer.

•Overloading the vehicle will have an

adverse affect on braking and

handling characteristics, which

could compromise your safety.

Overloading a vehicle may also

cause tire damage or failure.

Never overload your vehicle.

•TOWING: The XK has not been

designed as a towing vehicle and

Jaguar Cars does not manufacture

a tow bar for the vehicle.

281

Vehicle Identification

Chapter 9

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

NUMBER (VIN)

It is essential that the Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN) is quoted in all

correspondence and when ordering

replacement parts.

The number is visible from outside the

vehicle, on a plate in the lower left-hand

edge of the windshield.

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION

LABEL

Vehicles have the Certification Label

adhered to the left-hand door rear post.

Vehicle weights, paint code, manufacture

date and the VIN are shown on this plate.

ENGINE NUMBER

The number is located on the rear

left-hand side of the engine below the

rectangular block.

TRANSMISSION NUMBER

The number is etched on a plinth on the

side of the transmission casing.

JAG0396G

JAG0397G

Technical Specifications

282

Technical Specifications

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS

DIMENSIONS

Engine 4.2 litre V8

Capacity 4196 cm3 (255 inch3)Stroke 90.3 mm (3.555 inch)

Bore 86.0 mm (3.385 inch) Compression ratio 11.0:1 (9.1:1 supercharged)

JAG0398G

AOverall width, mirrors extended 2070 mm 81.5 in.

BOverall width, mirrors folded 1892 mm 74.5 in.

BOverall width, mirrors folded, rear arch extensions fitted 1912 mm 75.3 in.

CTrack: Front (maximum) 1560 mm 61.0 in.

DOverall height at gross vehicle weight (nominal) - Coupe 1287mm 50.6 in.

DOverall height at gross vehicle weight (nominal) -

Convertible

1294 mm 51.0 in.

EMinimum ground clearance (at gross vehicle weight) 100 mm 4.0 in.

FTrack: Rear (maximum) 1608 mm 63.3 in.

GWheelbase 2752 mm 108 in.

HOverall length 4791 mm 187 in.

Turning circle (curb to curb) 10.97 m 36.0 ft.

283

Technical Specifications

WEIGHTS

(AVERAGE/APPROXIMATE)

V8 4.2 litre normally aspirated engine

Note: Loads greater than 28 kg (62 lb)

may be carried in the luggage

compartment provided the maximum

technically permissible axle weights

shown on the vehicle identification plate

are not exceeded and the tires are inflated

to the normal pressures.

Coupe Convertible

kg lb kg lb

Curb weight (no options fitted) 1665 3671 1705 3759

Front axle Curb weight 887 1956 888 1958

Rear axle Curb weight 778 1715 817 1801

Gross Vehicle Weight (G.V.W.) 2035 4486 2075 4575

Gross front axle weight 1015 2238 1020 2249

Gross rear axle weight 1090 2403 1125 2480

Maximum recommended luggage

compartment load with passenger

and driver

28 62 28 62

Technical Specifications

284

V8 4.2 litre supercharged engine

Note: Loads greater than 28 kg (62 lb)

may be carried in the luggage

compartment provided the maximum

technically permissible axle weights

shown on the vehicle identification plate

are not exceeded and the tires are inflated

to the normal pressures.

Coupe Convertible

kg lb kg lb

Curb weight (no options fitted) 1730 3814 1780 3924

Front axle Curb weight 935 2061 943 2079

Rear axle Curb weight 795 1753 837 1845

Gross Vehicle Weight (G.V.W.) 2080 4586 2120 4674

Gross front axle weight 1050 2315 1050 2315

Gross rear axle weight 1095 2414 1130 2491

Maximum recommended luggage

compartment load with passenger

and driver

28 62 28 62

285

Technical Specifications

CAPACITIES

Fuel capacity

V8 4.2 litre normally aspirated engine

Litres Pints

Engine oil, including oil filter. 7.0 14.8

Cooling system, including reservoir and climate control. 10.4 22.0

Windshield and headlamp washer reservoir: 6.3 13.3

V8 4.2 litre supercharged engine

Litres Pints

Engine oil, including oil filter. 7.0 14.8

Cooling system, including reservoir and climate control. 10.0 21.1

Windshield and headlamp washer reservoir: 6.6 14.0

Total tank

capacity

71.1 litres

(18.8 Gallons)

Fill capacity

(when the fuel

gauge indicates

empty)

65.5 litres

(17.2 Gallons)

Reserve capacity

(when the fuel

gauge indicates

empty)

6.0 litres

(1.6 Gallons)

Type Approvals

286

Type Approvals

SMART KEY REMOTE

CONTROL RADIO FREQUENCY

The radio frequency remote system

operates on a frequency subject to USA

Federal Communications Commission

(FCC) rules.

The device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC rules and RSS-210 of the Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the two

following conditions:

•The device may not cause harmful

interference.

•This device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause

undesired operation.

The key transmitter radio frequency

approval numbers for the USA and

Canada are shown below:

USA - CWTWB1U243

Canada - 1788A-1U243

Note: The manufacturer is not

responsible for any radio interference or

TV interference caused by unauthorised

modifications to this equipment. Changes

or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance

could void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment.

Caution: The Jaguar Smart Key may

suffer interference from other legal

users of this radio frequency band,

such as radio amateurs, medical

equipment, remote controls or alarm

systems. To lock or unlock the vehicle

in such a situation, either use a key or

operate the key transmitter as close to

the security antenna on the front

screen as possible.

DECLARATION OF

CONFORMITY FOR THE

TELEPHONE SYSTEM

Export controls

This product contains commodities,

technology or software exported from the

United States in accordance with the

Export Administration regulations.

Diversion contrary to U.S. or Canadian

law is prohibited.

FCC/Industry Canada Notice

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) this device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

FCC ID: AZ489FT7024

Canada IC: 109U-89FT7024

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user's

authority to operate the equipment.

Note: This equipment has been tested

and found to comply with the limits for a

Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15

of the FCC Rules. These limits are

designed to provide reasonable

protection against harmful interference in

a residential installation.

287

Type Approvals

This equipment generates, uses and can

radiate radio frequency energy and, if not

installed and used in accordance with the

instructions, may cause harmful

interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that

interference will not occur in a particular

installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful

interference to radio or television

reception, which can be determined by

turning the equipment off and on, the user

is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the

following measures:

•

Reorient or relocate the receiving

antenna.

•

Increase the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

•

Connect the equipment into an outlet

on a circuit different from that to which

the receiver is connected.

•

Consult the dealer or an experienced

radio/TV technician for help.

DOLBY LICENSING

Dolby Pro Logic

Surround and the

double-D are

registered trademark

of Dolby Laboratories. Manufacturing

rights for Dolby Pro Logic Surround

System are licensed from Dolby

Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

The TPMS devices comply with part 15 of

the FCC Rules and RSS-210. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must

accept interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the manufacture

could void the users’ authority to operate

the equipment.

The TPMS radio frequency approval

numbers for the USA and Canada are

shown below:

USA FCC ID: KR5S120123,

TX KR55WK47594, RX 5WK4887.

Canada IC: 267T-S120123,

267T-5WK47594, CAN2671032336A.

288

Index

289

Accessory socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Active headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . 172

forward alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Adjusting the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Advanced restraint technology system

(ARTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Air bags

disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

occupancy sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

warning lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Alarms and audible signals . . . . . . . . . 49

Anti-lock braking system (ABS). . . . . 162

Audible warnings and indicators . . . . 116

Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

auto memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

automatic volume control . . . . . . . 190

band switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

CD operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

compact disc player . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Dolby licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

load a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

MP3 CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

premium sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

preset stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

programme type (PTY) . . . . . . . . . 188

radio text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

recordable CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

seek tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

unload a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Autolamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

windshield wiper detection . . . . . . . 72

Automatic speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . 180

Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . 157

gear selector positions. . . . . . . . . 157

gearshift interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Jaguar sequential shift mode gear

selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

limp-home mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

system fault display . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Battery

charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

disconnection effects. . . . . . . . . . 246

maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

using booster cables . . . . . . . . . . 243

warning signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Bi-Xenon headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Booster seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Brake fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

emergency brake assist . . . . . . . . 163

Bulbs

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Catalytic converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Checking and top up

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . 241

windshield/headlamp washer . . . 239

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

choosing a child seat . . . . . . . . . . 104

fitting the child seat . . . . . . . . . . . 105

infant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

LATCH seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

restraint check list . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

top tether anchorages . . . . . . . . . 106

Climate control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Clock adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Index

290

Computer active technology system

(CATS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Convenience mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Convertible top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

closing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

luggage separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

deploy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

normal stowage. . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

manual re-set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

winter conditions. . . . . . . . . . 150, 228

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

information messages. . . . . . . . . . 171

Dimmer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Driving after a collision . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Driving hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Driving position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Dynamic stability control. . . . . . . . . . 165

switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Electric park brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Electrical accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Emergency brake assist . . . . . . . . . . 163

Engine

coolant check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

keyless start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

oil check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

oil consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

rolling re-start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

starting and stopping . . . . . . . . . . . 50

stationary vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Environmental information . . . . . . . . 232

Event data recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Exterior lighting

daylight running lamps. . . . . . . . . . 73

exit delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

touring adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Facia and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Fire extinguisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Floor mat retention. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Forward alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Front seat heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Fuel and refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

refuelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

system fault display . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Fuel capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Fuel requirements

gasoline engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

fuse box locations . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

specification chart . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Garage door transceiver . . . . . . . . . 143

before programming . . . . . . . . . . 144

information and assistance . . . . . 146

programming the vehicle . . . . . . . 144

Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

General driving information

engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . 56

running-in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Ground points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Hazard warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Headlamp powerwash . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Health and safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Identification numbers

vehicle identification number . . . . 281

Inertia switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Index

291

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

dimmer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

message centre. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Interior features

centre console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

cigar lighter and ashtray . . . . . . . . 140

glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

accessory socket . . . . . . . . . . . 142

sunvisors

vanity mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Interior lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Jaguar parts and accessories . . . . . . . 31

Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Key transmitter radio frequency . . . . 286

Keyless entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Keyless starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Keys

key transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Keys and remote controls . . . . . . . . . . 34

information messages . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Smart Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Kickdown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

auto headlamp levelling . . . . . . . . . 76

autolamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

battery saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

bulb replacement

cornering lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

front direction indicator . . . . . . . 80

front sidelamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

headlamp assembly . . . . . . . . . . 77

license plate lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 83

main and dipped beam . . . . . . . 81

rear lamp unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

side marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

side repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

cabin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

entry and exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

front fog lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

hazard warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 74

reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

rear fog lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

sidelamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Locking the vehicle

drive-away locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

external locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

internal locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Locking wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Luggage compartment. . . . . . . . 43, 156

emergency release. . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

luggage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Luggage separator

deploy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

normal stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

regular servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Index

292

Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

passenger seat position . . . . . . . . 139

recalling memorised position . . . . 139

setting driving position . . . . . . . . . 139

Message centre. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

heating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

interior rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . 90

Occupant protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

On-board event data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Parkbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

system fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

touch-screen setting . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Power steering

fluid check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Powerwash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Production option weights . . . . . . . . 279

Protect the environment . . . . . . . . . . 232

Puncture

wheel changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Radio

display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Radio reception. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Rain sensitive wiper control . . . . . . . . 66

Rear impact protection . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Rear window operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Reception quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Recommended engine oil . . . . . . . . . 238

Regular servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Remote headlight convenience. . . . . . 49

Reporting safety defects. . . . . . . . . . . 33

Reservoir and dipstick locations

normally aspirated engine . . . 235, 236

Rollover protection system . . . . . . . . 102

Run-flat tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

final drive unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Satellite radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

home screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

preset radio stations . . . . . . . . . . 200

recalling presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

receiving satellite broadcasts . . . 199

song seek. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

subscription to SIRIUS. . . . . . . . . 208

Seat belts

beltminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

during pregnancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

tension sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Seat heaters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

driving position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

seatback tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Security

alarms and audible signals . . . . . . 49

immobiliser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Service data recording. . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Smart Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

battery renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

convenience mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

irregular operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Snow chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Spare wheel location . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

cruise controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Index

293

Technical data

engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Technical specifications

capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Telephone

answer options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

automatic answering . . . . . . . . . . . 214

bluetooth description . . . . . . . . . . 210

call continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

call volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

caller announce. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

changing a phone number . . . . . . 217

directory capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

directory, auto download . . . . . . . 215

do not disturb option. . . . . . . . . . . 221

ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

erase the telephone directory . . . . 216

handsfree, ending a call . . . . . . . . 220

handsfree, making a call . . . . . . . . 220

last 10 options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

magnify keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

name search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

pairing and docking. . . . . . . . . . . . 211

pairing other phones . . . . . . . . . . . 213

receiving a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

retrieving voice mail . . . . . . . . . . . 214

ringtones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

setting up your phone for use . . . . 211

settings menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . 220

system overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

using a different phone . . . . . . . . . 213

using your phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

voice mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Telephone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Temporary use spare wheel . . . . . . . 272

Tire pressure monitoring system. . . . 267

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

locking nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

recommended fitment . . . . . . . . . 266

renewal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

run-flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

uniform tire quality grades . . . . . . 277

wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

wheel changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

winter/snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Touch-screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

languages and units . . . . . . . . . . . 125

menu structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Pop-up messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Timeout to home screen . . . . . . . 126

use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Towing eye. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Transporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Type approvals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Using booster cables . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Index

294

Vehicle care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

alloy wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

automatic car wash. . . . . . . . . . . . 227

bird droppings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

carpet and mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

cloth and fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

convertible top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

glass surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

grease and tar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

high pressure wash . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

paint chips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

underhood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

washing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . 227

Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

VIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Warning lights and indicators . . . . . . 112

Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Warnings, cautions and notes. . . . . . . 30

Warranty

Mexico. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

USA and Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Washer fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Wheel changing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Wheel/tire data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

temporary use spare wheel. . . . . . 272

tire pressures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

wheel changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Whiplash protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Window tinting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Windows

anti-trap detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

thermal overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Windshield wipers/washers . . . . . . . . 65

maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Winter/snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Jaguar Jjm 18 02 30 701 Users Manual

JJM 18 02 30 701 to the manual 252a2b91-d9a8-4275-9653-62b558204f78

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation